/micro

Microwave
Programming

Class Manual

microFLEX
FLEX

Microwave Programming
Manual
553-401-78/1205 REV 002
T
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave Programming Class

Module 1-6
Class Manual
553-401-78/1205
MRP REV 002
/ MICRO MICROWAVE PROGRAMMING CLASS

Module 1-6 Class Manual

©T
321 Harrison Avenue
Boston, Massachusetts 02118

i
Limited Reproduction Rights for Teradyne
Customers
This document may be reproduced by a Teradyne customer under the Software
Product Support Agreement solely for internal use by the customer’s employees
whose responsibility includes Teradyne equipment. Any copy of this document, or
portions thereof, must contain copyright and propriety rights notice as stated on
the original.

© Copyright 2005 Teradyne Inc.

Printed in the U.S.A.
Teradyne Inc.
321 Harrison Avenue
Boston, MA 02118

The material contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
Teradyne Inc. assumes no responsibility for the completeness or accuracy of this
document. This document contains trade secrets and confidential information,
and is furnished pursuant to a license from Teradyne, Inc. Use or reproduction of
this document is restricted under the terms of the license.

Restricted Rights

Use, duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set

forth in paragraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clauses at 255.227-7013.

Acknowledgments

IG-XL Training Documentation contains references to Microsoft Excel and Visual

Basic environments. It also contains references to Windows NT, Windows 2000
and Windows XP.

ii
 Printing History

Document Name Part Number Version Description Date

FLEX MW Student Class Manual 553-401-78 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release 0 May 2005

FLEX MW Student Lab Guide 553-401-79 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release 0 May 2005

FLEX MW Student Class Manual 553-401-78 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.001 June 2005

FLEX MW Student Lab Guide 553-401-79 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.001 June 2005

FLEX/microFLEX MW Student Class Manual 553-401-78 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.002 Dec 2005

FLEX/microFLEX MW Student Lab Guide 553-401-79 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v. 002 Dec 2005

iii
Overall Class Objectives
Review RF/Microwave Basic Concepts and Test Principles
Provide an architectural overview of the FLEX-microFLEX Microwave
System
Provide the student with a broad understanding of how the FLEX-
microFLEX Microwave subsystem works:
o lower level hardware and software training to enable the
development of customized tests
o higher level user interfaces for faster test program development
Provide the student with practical experience using the IG-XL debug tools
for microwave test program development
Provide the student with practical experience using the tester to develop
and debug tests on a low-noise-amplifier (LNA) DUT, modulator DUT, and
demodulator DUT.
Use a thru cable to gain experience using MWSource and MWReceiver.

iv
Prerequisites
IG-XL Basic Programming
o Provides the student with the information necessary to write edit,
load and debug test programs on the FLEX-microFLEX test system
o Emphasis is on understanding procedures to run IG-XL software in
order to understand program structure when testing digital, analog
and mixed signal devices.
IG-XL Mixed-Signal Programming
Recommended: Applied RF Techniques I by Besser Associates

v
Table of Contents

MODULE 1 MODULE 6
Introduction to Sourcing PTS-310 Option M6 - 1
and Measuring RF Signals M1 - 13
FLEX-microFLEX Microwave
System Architecture M1 - 32
MWSource and MWReceiver M1 - 39 APPENDIX A
ZFL-1000 LN Data Sheet A1 - 1
MODULE 2 DIB Schematics A2 - 1
Gain M2 - 5
1 dB Compression M2 - 29
IMD/IP2/IP3 M2 - 33 APPENDIX B
Noise Figure M2 - 58 Microwave Specification B1 -1
Phase Noise M2 - 69 Document (ESSD)

MODULE 3 APPENDIX C
Analog Modulation M3 - 2 Transmission-Line Theory C-1
Quadrature Modulation M3 - 21
Modulated Source M3 - 62 APPENDIX D
Digital Modulation M3 - 85 List of Reference Materials D1 - 1

MODULE 4 APPENDIX E
One-Port S-Parameter M4 - 1 Sample Code (see Lab Solutions) E1 - 1

MODULE 5
S-Parameter Calibration M5 - 9
Receiver NF Calibration M5 - 14
ENR Calibration M5 - 17
MW CalDIB Software M5 - 20

vi
Agenda

Module 1:
Introduction: Sourcing and Measuring RF signals

FLEX-microFLEX System Overview

RF Concepts and Terms
FLEX-microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
MWSource and MWReceiver Architecture
Alternate Digitizer Captures
Module 1 Review
Source Receive
o Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
LABs (1.2-1.3 optional demos to be run latter in the course)
ƒ Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture With Digital
Pattern
ƒ Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC
Digitizer

Module 2:
RF Device Tests

RF Gain
o Lab 2.1 Measure LNA Gain
o Lab 2.2 Sweep LNA Gain
1dB Compression
IMD, IP2, IP3
o Lab 2.3 IP2 Measurement
o Lab 2.4 IP3 Measurement

Noise Figure
o Lab 2.5 Noise Figure Measurement
Phase Noise
o Lab 2.6 Phase Noise Measurement
Module 2 Review

vii
A G E N D A

Module 3:
Introduction to RF Modulation

Analog Modulation
o Lab 3.1 AM Modulation (BBAC&MWMS)
Quadrature Modulation
o Lab 3.2(BBAC)&3.2(VHFAC) Modulator/Demodulator
o Lab 3.3(BBAC)&3.3 (VHFAC) Modulator/Demodulator
Digital Modulation
Microwave Modulated Source (MWMS)
o Lab 3.4 GSM Signal Generation
Module 3 Review

Module 4:
S-parameters Tests

One-Port Sparameters Test

o Lab 4.1 One-Port Sparameter Test (S1P)

Module 5:
One-Port Sparameters, System NF and ENR
Calibrations

One-Port S-parameter Calibration

System Noise Figure Calibration
ENR Calibration

Module 6:
Optional Materials

PTS-310 Synthesizer

viii
M O D U L E 1

Module

1
Module 1 covers:

Introduction: Sourcing and

Measuring RF Signals
FLEX-microFLEX MICROWAVE
System Architecture
 /microFL X
Microwave Programming
Student Manual
FLEX

microFLEX
micro

PN 553-401-78 MRP- Rev 002

Limited Reproduction Rights

for Teradyne Customers

This document may be reproduced by a Teradyne customer under the Software Product Support
Agreement solely for internal use by the customer’s employees whose responsibility include
Teradyne equipment. Any copy of this document, or portions thereof, must contain copyright
and propriety rights notice as stated on the original. ©Copyright 2005 Teradyne Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A. Teradyne Inc., 321 Harrison Avenue Boston, MA 02118

The material contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Teradyne,
Inc. assumes no responsibility for the completeness or accuracy of this document. This
document contains trade secrets and confidential information, and is furnished pursuant to a
license from Teradyne, Inc. Use or reproduction of this document is restricted under the terms
of the license.

RESTRICTED RIGHTS
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
paragraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clauses at
252.227-7013.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
UltraFLEX, FLEX, Catalyst, and Tiger Training Documentation contains references to Windows
NT, Windows 2000 Windows XP, and Microsoft Visual Basic.
It may also contain references to SUN, UNIX, Sparc and Ultra workstations, SunOS and Solaris
OpenWindows and CDE environments.

Module 1 - 2
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

1
 Printing History

Document Name Part Number Version Description Date

FLEX MW Student Class Manual 553-401-78 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release 0 May 2005

FLEX MW Student Lab Guide 553-401-79 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release 0 May 2005

FLEX MW Student Class Manual 553-401-78 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.001 June 2005

FLEX MW Student Lab Guide 553-401-79 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.001 June 2005

FLEX/microFLEX MW Student Class Manual 553-401-78 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.002 Dec 2005

FLEX/microFLEX MW Student Lab Guide 553-401-79 IG-XL 5.00.80 Release v.002 Dec 2005

Module 1 - 3
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Course Revision History

Date +++ Session +++ Revision+++

Q4/2004 Workshop 01 w00
05/2005 Initial Release 000
06/2005 Update Release 001
12/2005 Update Release 002

Module 1 - 4
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

2
 Course Outline
I. Sourcing and Measuring RF signals III. RF Modulation, IQ Mod, IQ Demod
a. FLEX/microFLEX System Overview a. Analog Modulation
b. RF Concepts and Terms b. Lab 3.1 AM modulated wave (sim)
c. FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture c. Quadrature Modulation
d. MWSource and MWReceiver Instruments d. Lab 3.2 Quadrature Mod/Demod (BBAC)
e. Alternate Digitizer Captures e. Lab 3.3 Quadrature Mod/Demod(VHFAC)
f. Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back f. Microwave Modulated Source (MWMS)
g. Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture With Digital g. Lab 3.1 AM modulated wave (tester)
Pattern (optional to be run latter in the class)
h. Digital Modulation
h. Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC
Digitizer (optional to be run latter in the class) i. Lab 3.4 GSM Signal Generation (VHFAC)

II. RF Device Tests

a. RF Gain IV. T-Line Theory and Sparameters
b. Lab 2.1 Measure LNA Gain Tests
c. Lab 2.2 Sweep LNA Gain a. One-Port Sparameters Test
d. 1dB Compression b. Lab 4.1 One-Port Sparameters (S1P)
e. IMD, IP2, IP3 c. Two-Port Sparameters Test*
f. Lab 2.3 IP2, Lab 2.4 IP3 d. Lab 4.2 Two-Port Sparameters (S2P)*
g. Noise Figure f. De-embedding*
h. Lab 2.5 Noise Figure g. Appendix: Transmission Line Theory
i. Phase Noise
j. Lab 2.6 Phase Noise *Future sections
Module 1 - 5
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Course Outline (cont’

(cont’d)
V. One-Port Sparameters, System VI. Optional Materials
NF and ENR Calibrations
a. PTS 310 Synthesizer
b. RF Probe*
a. One-Port Sparameters Calibration
c. RF DIB Design*
b. System Noise Figure Calibration
d. RF Simulation Tools*
c. ENR Calibration
e. Multisite RF Test*
d. Two-Port Sparameters Calibration*
f. DSP*
g. Vector Math*

*Future sections

Module 1 - 6
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

3
 Microwave Course Overview

FLEX/microFLEX Microwave Programming Course Overview:

The FLEX/microFLEX Microwave Programming Course provides the student

with a basic introduction to FLEX/microFLEX microwave
instrumentation architecture and IG-XL microwave programming
software and test. Included are labs which allow the student to
perform typical microwave tests. Students perform these tests on
class DUTs, such as an LNA, Modulator, and Demodulator. Lab work
is on the tester as well as the simulator. Program debug and debug
tools are also explored.
Major topics covered include: Sourcing and Measuring RF signals, RF device
tests, RF Modulation, IQ Modulation, IQ Demodulation, and GMSK
signal generation, T-line theory, One Port S-Parameter tests, One
Port S-Parameter calibration, System NF calibration and ENR
calibration.

Module 1 - 7
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Agenda

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture With Digital Pattern (optional - run latter in the class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC Digitizer (optional – latter in the class)

¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 8
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

4
 Module 1: Objectives

™ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in the class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in the class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 9
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Objectives

™ On completion of this module the student should

be able to:

• Understand basic concepts related to Microwave and RF

power measurements.
• Understand the FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System
Architecture at a high level.
• Understand the functionality and the basic syntax of the
MW Receiver instrument, the MW Source instrument , and
the Microwave Port Module.
• Develop IG-XL code on the FLEX/microFLEX tester using
VBT code and DSP procedures to perform RF power
measurements.
• Debug IG-XL MW test programs using the WaveScope and
FLEX/microFLEX debug tools running on the host
computer.
• Run the test programs using the MW on-board G4
processor to get pass/fail results.

Module 1 - 10
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

5
 Module Assumptions and Conventions

¾ Module Objectives
™ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX-- System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in the class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in the class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 11
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module Assumptions and Conventions

¾ The MW FLEX/microFLEX Course prerequisites are the

IG-XL VBT Programming Class and the FLEX/microFLEX Mixed Signal
Programming Class.

¾ Recommended: Applied RF Techniques I by Besser Associates or equivalent.

¾ For the purpose of discussing the RF test concepts in this course, the
examples presented will assume that the user has a working knowledge of
how to enter information in the Test Flow, Test Instances, and Test
Procedures worksheets.

¾ The procedures and coding for setting up the DUT, which generally includes
powering-up, initializing, and setting the appropriate conditions for testing
will be supplied.

Module 1 - 12
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

6
 Module 1: FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF
Concepts

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
™ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in the class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in the class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 13
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

micro
Support
Cabinet
Support
Cabinet

Test Head Test Head

Module 1 - 14
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

7
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

RF Set

Support
Cabinet

Test Head
Module 1 - 15
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ IG-
IG-XL Software and Microwave Architecture

Building on the IG-XL

software foundation
MW Source

MW Receiver

DSP
Tools Worksheets (On-Board Digitizer)

FLEX Instruments MW Instruments DSP

displays displays (Support Board) Microwave instruments
Use IG-XL software
architecture Mod
Source

MW port module

VBT theHdw.MWSource Test Head

theHdw.MWReceiver

DUT
DIB

Module 1 - 16
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

8
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ IG-
IG-XL Software and Microwave Integrated Architecture

IG-XL - Microwave

MW Receiver
MW Source
/2 /2
Receive Receive
DSP
VHFAC BBAC (On-Board Digitizer)

/2 /2
Source Source
Mod Source

MW port module

DUT
Test Head

Module 1 - 17
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ IG-
IG-XL Software and Microwave Integrated Architecture

The MW instrumentation can be connected to both the BBAC and VHFAC

instruments through an AUX Port on the FLEX/microFLEX back plane.

When sourcing from the baseband instruments and capturing with the
MWReceiver, the VHFACSource and BBACSource baseband instruments, are
used by the MWModulated Source, providing the modulation for the MW
instrument.

RULE: Sourcing: Only one Baseband AWG instrument at a time, (either the
BBAC Source or
VHFAC Source) can be connected to the MW Board for IF sourcing.

RULE: Receiving: The MWReceiver instrument can send its retrieved signals
simultaneously to the MW on-board digitizer, BBACCapture instrument,
VHFACCapture instrument, or any combination of them. That is, the
MWReceiver capture always goes to the MW on-board digitizer. However, you
can select to send the signals to MW on-board digitizer only or to the ON/OFF
Board IF Capture instruments simultaneously.

Module 1 - 18
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

9
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Architecture Overview of MWSource Physical Unit

Support Cabinet Test Head DIB

RF2 RF1

MWSRC
CC
B
SRC1
6GHz frequency
Port (A)
synthesizer A MWSRC
CC Module
SRC2
(B)
B
6GHz frequency MWSRC
synthesizer A CC Third
Channel SRC3
Module (LO)

NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 19
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Architecture Overview of MWReceiver Physical Unit

Support Cabinet Test Head DIB

RF1

G4 DSP
(A)
Port
MW Digitizer Module
(B)
IF
B
6 GHz frequency LO RF Third
synthesizer A Channel (LO)
Module

NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 20
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

10
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Time Domain and Frequency Domain analysis

• Time Domain (discrete sample set)
Source Instruments require time domain samples.
Receive Instruments capture require time domain samples.

• Freq Domain (Spectrum)

Analysis is done in DSP using spectral information, scaled in dB

Module 1 - 21
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Unit of Measurement: dB
• dB is most common unit used in
dB ratio dB ratio
Microwave/RF testing -120 10^-12 -9 0.126 (1/8)

• dB Denotes ratio: -110 10^-11 -8 0.158

-100 10^-10 -7 0.199 (1/5)

dB = 20 log10 V2/V1 -90 10^-9 -6 0.251 (1/4)
dB = 10 log10 P2/P1 -80 10^-8 -5 0.316 (sqrt 10)

-70 10^-7 -4 0.398 (2/5)

• Logarithmic scale: multiplication -60 10^-6 -3 0.501 (1/2)

transformed to addition -50 10^-5 -2 0.631

• Double power: add 3 dB -40 10^-4 -1 0.794

-30 10^-3 (0.001) -0.5 0.891

• Half power: subtract 3 dB -20 10^-2 (0.01) -0.1 0.977 (98%,-2%)

-10 10^-1 (0.1) 0.1 1.023 (+2%)

• 10 dB = factor of 10
0 1 0.5 1.122

• To change dB sign, take reciprocal 10 10 1.0 1.259

20 10^2 (100) 3 1.995 (2)

30 10^3 (1000) 6 3.98 (4)

7 5.011 (5)

Module 1 - 22
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

11
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Unit of Measurement: dBm

• A variation of the dB unit which is used to quantify microwave signals is the dBm, where:

PowerdBm = 10 log10 (P2/P1) where: P1 = 1.0 mW)

PowerdBm = 10 log10 (power in mW)

(dB is normalized to 1mW)

Module 1 - 23
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ To convert from Volts to dBm in a 50Ω system:

⎛V 2 ⎞
PdBm = 10 × log ⎜⎜ RMS × 1000 ⎟⎟
⎝ 50 ⎠
= 10 × log VRMS × 20
2
( )
¾ To convert from dBm to Volts in a 50Ω system:
⎛ PdBm ⎞ ⎛ PdBm ⎞ ⎛ PdBm ⎞ ⎛ PdBm ⎞
⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
10 ⎝ 10 ⎠
10 ⎝ 10 ⎠
10 ⎝ 10 ⎠
10 ⎝ 10 ⎠
VPK = = V RMS = =
10 10 10 × 2 20
‰ Power is proportional to V2/R
• V is voltage
• R is characteristic load impedance

‰ For time-varying signals, average power is V2RMS/R

• Power measured by an “ideal” detector with slow response

VPEAK
‰ For a sinusoid: VRMS =
2
‰ Peak power = V2PEAK/R

Module 1 - 24
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

12
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ To convert from VRMS to dBm in a 50Ω system:

PdBm = 20 × log VRMS × 20 ( )

⎛V ⎞
= 20 × log⎜ PK × 20 ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠

¾ To convert from VPK to dBm in a 50Ω system

PdBm = 20 × log VPK × 10 ( )

= 20 × log(VPK ) + 10

Module 1 - 25
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Unit of Measurement: dBm

Here is a conversion table to convert dBm to power to voltage.
Note that 0.0 dBm equals 1 mW in a 50 ohm system.
dBm mW mVrms mVpk mVpp
dBm mW mVrms mVpk mVpp
-54.00 3.98E-06 4.46E-01 6.31E-01 1.26E+00
30.00 1000.0000 7071.0678 10000.0000 20000.0000
-57.00 2.00E-06 3.16E-01 4.47E-01 8.93E-01
27.00 501.1872 5005.9326 7079.4578 14158.9157
-60.00 1.00E-06 2.24E-01 3.16E-01 6.32E-01
24.00 251.1886 3543.9289 5011.8723 10023.7447
-63.00 5.01E-07 1.58E-01 2.24E-01 4.48E-01
21.00 125.8925 2508.9095 3548.1339 7096.2678
18.00 63.0957 1776.1719 2511.8864 5023.7729
-66.00 2.51E-07 1.12E-01 1.58E-01 3.17E-01
15.00 31.6228 1257.4334 1778.2794 3556.5588 -69.00 1.26E-07 7.93E-02 1.12E-01 2.24E-01
12.00 15.8489 890.1947 1258.9254 2517.8508 -72.00 6.31E-08 5.62E-02 7.94E-02 1.59E-01
9.00 7.9433 630.2096 891.2509 1782.5019 -75.00 3.16E-08 3.98E-02 5.62E-02 1.12E-01
6.00 3.9811 446.1542 630.9573 1261.9147 -78.00 1.58E-08 2.82E-02 3.98E-02 7.96E-02
3.00 1.9953 315.8530 446.6836 893.3672 -81.00 7.94E-09 1.99E-02 2.82E-02 5.64E-02
0.00 1.00E+00 2.24E+02 3.16E+02 6.32E+02 -84.00 3.98E-09 1.41E-02 2.00E-02 3.99E-02
-3.00 5.01E-01 1.58E+02 2.24E+02 4.48E+02 -87.00 2.00E-09 9.99E-03 1.41E-02 2.83E-02
-6.00 2.51E-01 1.12E+02 1.58E+02 3.17E+02 -90.00 1.00E-09 7.07E-03 1.00E-02 2.00E-02
-9.00 1.26E-01 7.93E+01 1.12E+02 2.24E+02 -93.00 5.01E-10 5.01E-03 7.08E-03 1.42E-02
-12.00 6.31E-02 5.62E+01 7.94E+01 1.59E+02 -96.00 2.51E-10 3.54E-03 5.01E-03 1.00E-02
-15.00 3.16E-02 3.98E+01 5.62E+01 1.12E+02 -99.00 1.26E-10 2.51E-03 3.55E-03 7.10E-03
-18.00 1.58E-02 2.82E+01 3.98E+01 7.96E+01 -102.00 6.31E-11 1.78E-03 2.51E-03 5.02E-03
-21.00 7.94E-03 1.99E+01 2.82E+01 5.64E+01 -105.00 3.16E-11 1.26E-03 1.78E-03 3.56E-03
-24.00 3.98E-03 1.41E+01 2.00E+01 3.99E+01 -108.00 1.58E-11 8.90E-04 1.26E-03 2.52E-03
-27.00 2.00E-03 9.99E+00 1.41E+01 2.83E+01 -111.00 7.94E-12 6.30E-04 8.91E-04 1.78E-03
-30.00 1.00E-03 7.07E+00 1.00E+01 2.00E+01 -114.00 3.98E-12 4.46E-04 6.31E-04 1.26E-03
-33.00 5.01E-04 5.01E+00 7.08E+00 1.42E+01 -117.00 2.00E-12 3.16E-04 4.47E-04 8.93E-04
-36.00 2.51E-04 3.54E+00 5.01E+00 1.00E+01 -120.00 1.00E-12 2.24E-04 3.16E-04 6.32E-04
-39.00 1.26E-04 2.51E+00 3.55E+00 7.10E+00
-42.00 6.31E-05 1.78E+00 2.51E+00 5.02E+00
-45.00 3.16E-05 1.26E+00 1.78E+00 3.56E+00
-48.00 1.58E-05 8.90E-01 1.26E+00 2.52E+00
-51.00 7.94E-06 6.30E-01 8.91E-01 1.78E+00
54 00 3 98E 06 4 46E 01 6 31E 01 1 26E 00

Module 1 - 26
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

13
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Unit of Measurement: dB, dBm, dBc

• The logarithmic scale is used for all different types of measurements.
• When comparing to power levels expressed in “dBm” then a dBc unit is used.
• dBc refers to a difference in power level of one signal compared to another signal, usually a Carrier.
• Sometimes, dB is used in place of dBc, dBm, etc., but remember dB and dBc are relative, they
are unitless, whereas dBm is an absolute unit, referenced to 1 milliwatt.

dBm
+10
+50dBc
- 40 +70dBc
+20dB
- 60

f0 2f0 3f0 frequency

+dBm = dB above 1 milliwatt

Pfundamental (or Pcarrier) =
+10dBm dBc = dB relative to carrier power

Module 1 - 27
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Microwave Circuit Behavior

• Microwave/RF circuits can have complex behavior compared to low frequency circuits.
(KVL and KCL laws no longer apply.)
• Higher frequency = shorter wavelength
• Lumped circuit models assume wavelength is much larger than the circuit elements.
• For GHz frequencies, “cm” wavelengths are no longer large compared to a circuit
elements.
• Lumped element circuits assume all electric fields are in capacitors, magnetic fields are in
inductors.
• Microwave (electromagnetic wave) propagation involves both electric and magnetic fields
simultaneously:

− At high frequencies, leaded “capacitor” or “resistor” can look like an “inductors”

because of lead inductance.
− Propagation along wires is a complicated geometric problem where the geometry can
determine circuit parameters.
− Discontinuities (e.g., corners, inconsistent width) of a line can cause the line to
exhibit unwanted capacitance and/or inductance.
• Conclusion: wave theory is usually required for analysis of microwave circuits.

Module 1 - 28
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

14
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Microwave Transmission Lines

• When dealing with RF and microwave signals, special care must be taken to design signal
connections and signal paths using transmission lines since wires and PC traces affect signal
integrities at elevated frequencies.

• The transmission line characteristic impedance is most often 50 ohms for microwave test
equipment.

• The two types of transmission lines often used in ATE are coaxial and microstrip.

• A more thorough discussion of transmission line theory will be presented.

Coaxial Dielectric material Microstrip

Dielectric material
(PCB)
Center Conductor

Center Conductor = signal

Outer Conductor = ground return Ground return

Module 1 - 29
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Microwave Signal Integrity

• When dealing with coaxial connectors and cables, it is important to make

a solid connection at the connector interface by properly tightening
connectors using a torque wrench calibrated according to the connector
manufacture specification.

• Overtightening connectors can damage the connectors or the launch pads

on the circuit board.

• Undertightening can make loose connections that can cause poor signal
integrity.

• Keep connectors clean. Do not rotate the center pin when connecting or
disconnecting.

Module 1 - 30
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

15
 Module 1: FLEX System Overview and RF Concepts

¾ Common RF Connector Types

• SMA (SubMiniature version A) : (3.5mm) has threaded ground connector nut (most common
cable connector with range up to 18 GHz)
• SMB – smaller version of SMA with snap-on coupling (range up to 10GHz)
• K-type (covers all the K freq. band) : is precision 3.5mm size. Avoid using SMA male on K
females. (range 40 GHz)
• BNC (Bayonet Neill Concelman) : has bayonet ground connection (reduced frequency range
dc to 4 GHz)
• N (Neill) -type: large, threaded connector nut; can carry higher power (range 11 GHz)
• OSP (Omni-Spectra push-on) : spring-loaded, no threads: “blind-mate” insertion (DIB
interface)(range 22 GHz)
• APC: precision hermaphroditic connector: laboratory grade
• OSX, OSSP (Omni-Spectra subminiature push-on )(range 28 GHz) , SMP: miniature types (range dc
to 40 GHz)
• SMCC: RosenbergerTM surface mount coaxial connector (opposite-side PCB launch)
• Many others…
Ð http://ece-www.colorado.edu/~kuester/Coax/connchart.htm ( link to University of Colorado Web page connector chart for connector photo, specs, info)

 Note: Coaxial adapters are commonly used on bench equipment to

protect the instrument connectors from repeated use.

Module 1 - 31
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
™ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
™ Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 32
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

16
 Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture

¾Basic System Architecture: Test Head

Set 1 default location: Test Head Slots 2 &3

Cables to
Cabinets

Set 1 optional location: Test Head Slots 12 &13 J1 J26

J13 J14

Test Head without DIB

Set 1 optional location: Test Head Slots 25 &26

Set 1 optional location: Test Head Slots 15 &16

NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 33
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture

¾Basic System Architecture: Source/Receive signal paths

(Microwave Instrument Functional Diagram)

Note: This diagram is gives introductory general overview. Future slides give more detail and additional allowed signal path combinations mapped to OSP connectors

Module 1 - 34
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

17
 Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture
¾ Basic System Architecture:
• The FLEX Microwave system combines multiple hardware resources to source and
measure RF signals and also to provide a fully functional high-performance Vector
Network Analyzer (VNA):
9 RF Synthesizers in the support cabinet provide high quality sinusoids up to 6GHz.

9 A Synthesizer Control Card in the support cabinet card cage controls the
synthesizer frequency.

9 The Microwave Instrument consists of two boards (RF1 and RF2) that are
located in the test head.

9 Multiple cables (Connections) link the MW system together and distribute

signals, data, etc.

9 Microwave Instrument’s software supports IG-XL programming through

a. Procedure Test Elements (Graphical “PDE” environment)
b. Visual Basic for Test (VBT) preferred
9 DSP Programming in VBT:
a. High-speed on-board digitizer and embedded G4 processor on the RF1 board.
b. MW DSP Programming code that is identical to the DSP programming for other
FLEX instruments (DSSC, baseband, etc.).

Module 1 - 35
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture

¾ Microwave Instrument Test Head Boards: RF1 and RF2

• RF1 Board provides:

9 Dedicated G4 DSP processor and embedded control
9 “MW Port Module” which controls connections to the DUT load board
interface
9 “MW Measure Module” to downconvert RF signals for digitizing
9 “On-Board” digitizer: 100 MHz sample rate, 40 MHz IF bandwidth

• RF2 Board provides:

9 DC power for both RF1 and RF2
9 MW Source level control

Module 1 - 36
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

18
 Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture

¾ Microwave Instrument Physical Connections

• RF umbilical cord between boards: carries source signals to RF1

• Power umbilical cord between boards: carries DC power to RF1
• Digital umbilical cord between boards: carry source control signals to RF2
• RF cables from cabinet to test head: to RF2 for sources, to RF1 for receiver
“local oscillator” (LO)
• Digital LVDS (low voltage differential signal) cables from test head to cabinet:
send synthesizer commands
• PC controls for the RF system through the backplane to the RF1 board

Module 1 - 37
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: FLEX Microwave System Architecture

¾ Microwave Instrument Boards: Test Head Slot Allocation

• Only one microwave instrument set can be installed in a tester.

Possible Set Location:

• Microwave Instrument boards can be installed in test head slots 2 & 3

default location.

• Or Microwave Instrument boards can be installed in optional test head

slot location 12 & 13.
• Or Microwave Instrument boards can be installed in optional test head
slot location 15 & 16.
• Or Microwave Instrument boards can be installed in optional test head
slot location 25 & 26.

NOTE: microFLEX Test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 38
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

19
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 39
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MW Source hardware paths

Support Cabinet Test Head DIB

RF2 RF1

MWSRC
CC
B
SRC1
6GHz frequency
Port (A)
synthesizer A MWSRC
CC Module
SRC2
(B)
B
6GHz frequency MWSRC
synthesizer A CC Third
Channel SRC3
(usually
Module LO,
but not
limited
to this
use)

NOTE: microFLEX Test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 40
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

20
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWSource Instrument

• The Microwave source instrument consists of:

9 A frequency synthesizer in support cabinet that sets the desired

frequency
9 A Source channel card on RF2 board that sets the RF power level
9 A Port Module on the RF1 board that connects the MW Source to the
DIB OSP interface
9 A Third Channel Module (TCM) on RF1 board that can connect the MW
LO Source synthesizer to the DIB OSP interface

Module 1 - 41
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWSource hardware paths

Support Cabinet Test Head

RF2 RF1

A B SRC SRC1
(A)
6GHz frequency
synthesizer Port
SRC2
(B)
SRC

A B SRC3
(LO)
6GHz frequency
TCM
SRC

synthesizer

Module 1 - 42
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

21
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWSource OSP Port Connections

• Support up to three sources per MW Instrument Board.

• Main Channels:
9 Source 1 to “A” ports
9 Source 2 to “B” ports

• Main Channel Add paths:

9 Source 1 to “A” port, combines with Source 2
9 Source 2 to “B” port, combine with Source 1

• DUT LO Channels (option):

9 Source 3 to the TCM “LO” ports

Module 1 - 43
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

(FLEX Gen4 Microwave)
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports
¾ Port Module
Connections:

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 1 - 44
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

22
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
(FLEX Gen4 Microwave)
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports
¾ MWSource
Connections:

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
TCM
Synthesizer
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 1 - 45
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Port Module Connections

• The Port Module multiplexes MW resources to DIB OSP connections.

• Only one A port, one B port, and 1 LO OSP port can be connected
simultaneously.

• Cannot connect a source and use the LNA receive path on the B mux or TCM at
the same time. However, the directional coupler allows the receiver to be used
for making S-Parameter measurements.

• Combiners (“Add Paths”) allow source 1 and 2 to be combined to either port A

or port B through the MW Port Module for two-tone sourcing.

Module 1 - 46
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

23
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
( FLEX Gen4 Microwave )
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports
¾ MW Port Module
Add Paths:

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 1 - 47
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWSource System Specifications *

– Frequency range: 50 MHz to 6000 MHz

– Frequency resolution:
• 50MHz to 4000MHz: 2 Hz
• 4000MHz to 6000MHz: 4 Hz

– Amplitude range:
• Main channel: 50 MHz…3 GHz: +13 dBm to –100 dBm
Main channel: 3 GHz…6 GHz: +10 dBm to –100 dBm
• Main channel, Indirect/Add Path: 50 MHz…6 GHz: -7 dBm to –100 dBm
• Support Source channels: 50 MHz…6 GHz: +10 dBm to –30 dBm

– Amplitude resolution: 0.1 dB

– Phase Noise at 3000 MHz:

• 10 kHz offset: -116 dBc/Hz
• 10 MHz offset: -138 dBc/Hz
– Available Modes:
• Continuous Wave (CW)
• Modulation (Microwave Modulated Source: MWMS)
* Most recent ESSD as of this release (rev002) is located in Appendix B

Module 1 - 48
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

24
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWSource Level Accuracy: Main Path*

Source 1 to A ports, Source 2 to B ports

Carrier Frequency Level Range Accuracy

50MHz .. 3000MHz -15dBm...-+10dBm ±0.5dB

50MHz .. 3000MHz -50dBm...--15dBm ±0.65dB

50MHz .. 3000MHz -70dBm...-50dBm ±0.9dB

3000MHz .. 6000MHz -15dBm...-+10dBm ±0.6dB

3000MHz .. 6000MHz -50dBm...--15dBm ±0.75dB

3000MHz .. 6000MHz -70dBm...-50dBm ±1.0dB

Signal accuracy is guaranteed by Autocalibration.

No external calibration necessary!

*A subset from the most recent ESSD as of this release (rev002) is located in Appendix B

Module 1 - 49
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWSource VBT programming:

• MW Source Syntax:
Dim pinname As String ' could be list of pins

pinname= “RF_in”

With thehdw.MWSource.pins(pinname)
.frequency = 1000000000# ' in Hz, 50 MHz to 6 GHz
.amplitude = -30 ' in dBm -100 to +13 dBm
.connect ' makes the source connection
End with

thehdw.MWSource.pins(pinname).Disconnect

‘ readback
Debug.Print pinname & " Connection State: " & thehdw.MWSource.pins(pinname).IsConnected
Debug.Print pinname & " Frequency: " & thehdw.MWSource.pins(pinname).Frequency & " Hz"
Debug.Print pinname & " Power: “ & thehdw.MWSource.pins(pinname).Amplitude & " dBm“

• Use VBT .pins syntax to reduce repetition, improve execution speed:

With thehdw.MWSource.pins(pinname)
.frequency = … ‘ repeating pins() avoids getting out of sync
.amplitude = … ‘ when TDE debug display is open
End with

Module 1 - 50
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

25
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver hardware paths

Support Cabinet Test Head DIB

RF1

G4 DSP
(A)
Port
MW Digitizer Module
(B)
IF
6GHz frequency
B LO Third
synthesizer Channel (LO)
A
Module

NOTE: microFLEX Test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 51
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Instrument

• The Microwave Receiver consists of:

9 An RF synthesizer in the support cabinet provides a LO (local oscillator) for the RF

down converter (mixer).

9 A Port Module that connects DIB pins to the measure module RF input.

9 A Microwave Measure Module (MWMM) on the RF1 board down converts RF signal to
IF.

9 The MWMM IF output provides leveling control for the signal going into the on-board
digitizer.

9 An on-Board digitizer captures the IF signal from the MWMM.

9 An embedded G4 processor (“DSP module”) provides DSP operation on the captured

signals and eliminates the need to move captured data from capture memory.

Module 1 - 52
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

26
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver hardware paths

Support Cabinet Test Head

RF2 RF1

SRC1
A B
(A)
6GHz frequency
synthesizer Port
SRC2
(B)

A B
DIG SRC3
(LO)
6GHz frequency
TCM
synthesizer DSP

RECV

Module 1 - 53
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

( FLEX Gen4 Microwave )
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports
¾ MW Port Module
Receiver Connection Paths:

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 1 - 54
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

27
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MW Port Module Receiver Connection Paths

• The MW Port Module (MWPM) multiplexes the test head OSP connectors to the
MW Receiver.

• The MW Receiver MWPM LNA (low-noise amplifier) path is available on “B” side
ports.

• The MW Receiver paths on other ports are through the reflect path of
directional coupler.

• The directional coupler has a lower gain and higher noise floor than can be
attained through the LNA ports, but they can accommodate higher power
levels.
• The MW Receive path can be connected to either the TCM ports or the B ‘OSP’
ports, but not connected to both port types at the same time.

Module 1 - 55
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Instrument Functional Overview

Signal
From DUT Delay Line

Phase Shift
From Receiver LO
Synthesizer
Phase Noise Option

High Speed ADC

High Speed HW DSP 14 Bit
Data Bus RESAMPLER 100MS/s
40MHz BW

ONBOARD DIGITIZER

To other digitizers
(BBAC, VHFAC)

Module 1 - 56
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

28
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Functional Block Diagram

Down converter Lowpass Bandpass ADC

Filter Filter

to BBAC
LO MW DIB/Pogo
VHFAC
Pin

14 bit
RF fixed
IF sample
rate
50MHz to 50kHz to 1MHz
6GHz, 3.125 to
40MHz 10MHz
-150dBm 100MS/s,
40MHz bypass
to sample
20dBm size 4M

Module 1 - 57
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave On-
On-Board Digitizer Capability*

On-board MW Digitizer (Main)

Capture BW Bit Resolution

3.125 MHz 14
6.25 MHz 13.5
12.5 MHz 13
25 MHz 12.5
50 MHz 12

* Most recent ESSD as of this release (rev002) is located in Appendix B

Module 1 - 58
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

29
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Alternative Digitizer Capabilities*

VHFAC Digitizer (Alternate)

Capture BW Bit Resolution

32.5 MHz 14
64.5 MHz 12
300 MHz Analog BW,
w/undersampling 14

BBAC Digitizer (Alternate)

Capture BW Bit Resolution

<3 MHz,=3MHz 14
>3 MHz <15 MHz 12

* Most recent ESSD as of this release (rev002) is located in Appendix B

Module 1 - 59
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver System Specifications*

• The MWReceiver is a “compound instrument” consisting of an RF

downconverter (MWMM) and the on-board digitizer.
• RF Input Frequency range 50 MHz to 6000 MHz
• RF Input Amplitude range up to +20 dBm
• IF Bandwidth 100 kHz…40 MHz
• IIP3 (low-distortion, directional coupler path, at power levels not
requiring the MWMM RF amplifier)
‰ 50 MHz…600 MHz: +24 dB
‰ 600 MHz…6 GHz: +30 dB

* Most recent ESSD as of this release (rev002) is located in Appendix B

Module 1 - 60
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

30
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Level Accuracy*

RF Frequency Level Range Accuracy

50MHz .. 5000MHz +20dBm .. -50dBm ±0.6dB

50MHz .. 5000MHz -15dBm .. -70dBm ±0.6dB

5000MHz .. 6000MHz +20dBm .. -50dBm ±0.7dB

5000MHz .. 6000MHz -15dBm .. -70dBm ±0.7dB

Measurement accuracy is guaranteed by Autocalibration.

No external calibration is necessary!

* Most recent ESSD as of this release (rev002) is located in Appendix B

Module 1 - 61
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ RF1 Board Block Diagram

Primary instrument board

DSP IF Receiver LO
Module Digitizer from cabinet

DIB
Port Pogo
16 inches
Measure Module Module Connectors
Third
Channel
Module
DIB
RF Source Microwave
from RF2 Connectors

30 inches

Module 1 - 62
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

31
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ RF2 Board Block Diagram

DC Power
converters Secondary (source) instrument board
Source synths
from cabinet

Source Module Source Module

No
16 inches DIB
Connectors
Source Module

RF Source
to RF1

26 inches
Module 1 - 63
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ DIB RF Interface to OSP Plane:

(Test Head Top View) CABLES TO
CABINETS

Optional - Test
Head RF slot
location

3.osp1

4.osp1

NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere Module 1 - 64

PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

32
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave Instrument: DIB Pogo Pin and OSP Interface:

(Test Head Top View)

CABLES TO
CABINETS

3.osp1
A38

4.osp1

Module 1 - 65
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Tester configuration
example

NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 66
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

33
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
Location Signal Name Function

¾ Microwave 3.osp1
3.osp2
3.a1
3.a2
Microwave Port, source and measure
Microwave Port, source and measure
A ports
Instrument Functional 3.osp3 3.a3 Microwave Port, source and measure

Diagram: OSPs
3.osp4 3.a4 Microwave Port, source and measure
3.osp5 TCM 3.lo1 Microwave Port, DUT LO source
3.osp6 TCM 3.lo2 Microwave Port, DUT LO source
4.osp1 4.b1 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA
4.osp2 4.b2 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA
Note: This diagram gives an B ports
4.osp3 4.b3 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA
introductory general overview,
future slides give more detail and 4.osp4 4.b4 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA
additional allowed signal path 4.osp5 TCM 4.lo3 Microwave Port, DUT LO source
combinations mapped to osp
connectors (4.osp6) N/C Unused

Noise Source
path LNA
path

Module 1 - 67
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave Instrument: DIB Interface Connections:

• A microwave instrument set can provide up to 11 OSP connector ports.
• The OSP connectors are oriented toward the center of the test head.
• OSP connectors are blind mate coaxial connectors.
• The OSP block requires two DIB slots, each referenced by its own slot number.

Center of test head

DIB slot 3
A38 A1 .osp6 .osp5 .osp4 .osp3 .osp2 .osp1
Pogo Pins
D38 D1
N/C .osp5 .osp4 .osp3 .osp2 .osp1
DIB slot 4

Digital, DC, and low frequency signals Microwave signals use OSP connectors
use Pogo pins at DIB slots toward the and coaxial cables toward the center of
outer edge of the test head. the test head.

Module 1 - 68
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

34
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave Instrument: OSP DIB Interface Channel Designations:

DIB slot 3
A38 A1 .osp6 .osp5 .osp4 .osp3 .osp2 .osp1
Pogo Pins
D38 D1
N/C .osp5 .osp4 .osp3 .osp2 .osp1
DIB slot 4

Location Signal Name Function TH HW Ref

3.osp1 3.a1 Microwave Port, source and measure 2.rf1
3.osp2 3.a2 Microwave Port, source and measure 2.rf2
3.osp3 3.a3 Microwave Port, source and measure 2.rf3
3.osp4 3.a4 Microwave Port, source and measure 2.rf4
3.osp5 3.lo1 Microwave Port, DUT LO source 2.rf9
3.osp6 3.lo2 Microwave Port, DUT LO source 2.rf10
4.osp1 4.b1 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA 2.rf5
4.osp2 4.b2 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA 2.rf6
4.osp3 4.b3 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA 2.rf7
4.osp4 4.b4 Microwave Port, source and measure with LNA 2.rf8
4.osp5 4.lo3 Microwave Port, DUT LO source 2.rf11
(4.osp6) N/C Unused

Module 1 - 69
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave Instrument: DIB Pogo Pin Designations

Microwave DIB slots 2, 24, 29, and 49 use the same 4x38 pin pattern as many other FLEX
instruments. (DIB slots refer to J numbers.)

Optional -Test
Head RF slot
location

A38 J1 A1 D1 J28 D38

J2 J29
D38 D1 A1 A38
J3 J30
J4 center J31
. Optional -Test
of
test
.
J22 J47
Optional -Test
Head RF slot
location head Head RF slot
location

A38 J23 A1 D1 J48 D38

J24 J49
D38 J25 D1 A1 J50 A38
NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere
Module 1 - 70
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

35
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave Instrument: DIB Pogo Pin Connections

• A microwave instrument set uses 28 of the 4x38 Pogo pins.
• Pogo pins can be used to add DC offset to the RF signal paths through internal bias tees,
for off-board triggers, or to access nodes inside the MW Receiver.

DC Bias Voltage Inputs for Microwave Ports

Event Triggers Port Force Pin Sense Pin
Pin Name Pin slot3.osp1 B32 A32
DIB_DUT_EVENT_TRIGGER C36 slot3.osp2 A29 B29

RF_EVENT_TRIGGER D36 slot3.osp3 D32 C32

slot3.osp4 B30 A30
slot3.osp5 D34 C34
slot3.osp6 A35 B35
Access to Receiver IF
slot4.osp1 A31 B31
Name Signal Ground Pin slot4.osp2 B34 A34
Pin
User_Receiver_IF_Output_Access D8 C8 slot4.osp3 D30 C30
slot4.osp4 A33 B33
User_Digitizer_IF_Input_Access A3 B3
slot4.osp5 B36 A36

Module 1 - 71
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ System Configuration Files: Output files generated by IG-

IG-XL

• When IG-XL is loaded, the software searches for a TesterConfig.txt file when on the tester or a
SimulatedConfig.txt file when running off-line.

• IG-XL searches for the config files in the following order:

1. $CWD (current working directory)

2. <IG-XL path>/tester
3. <IG-XL path>/bin

• When IG-XL locates the appropriate config.txt file, two files are created:

1. A hardware configuration and slot map file is generated and saved in:

C:\Program Files\Teradyne\IG-XL\5.00.50_flx\tester\CurrentConfig.txt

2. The TesterChannel/DibChannel/SignalName definitions are also created in:

C:\Program Files\Teradyne\IG-XL\5.00.50_flx\tester\CurrentChannelMap.txt

Module 1 - 72
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

36
Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ System Configuration Files: Input files to IG-

IG-XL

• When on the tester, you can copy the contents of the following file to the $CWD directory for
running on the simulator when working off-line:

C:\Program Files\Teradyne\IG-XL\5.00.50_flx\tester\CurrentConfig.txt

• Before starting IG-XL on the simulator, rename the CurrentConfig.txt file saved in the $CWD
directory that was copied from the <IG-XL>/tester directory to:

<$CWD>\SimulatedConfig.txt

Module 1 - 73
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ System Configuration Files: Input files used by IG-

IG-XL

• Alternatively, when running on the simulator off-line, the user can copy the contents of one of
the sample TesterConfig.txt files from the <IG-XL>\bin directory to the $CWD.

• Before starting IG-XL on the simulator, rename the TesterConfig.txt file saved in the $CWD
directory that was copied from the <IG-XL>\bin directory to:

<$CWD>\SimulatedConfig.txt

Module 1 - 74
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

37
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ System configuration Files: examples

CurrentChannelMap.txt CurrentConfig.txt

Module 1 - 75
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Assigning RF Pins in the IG-

IG-XL Pin Map Worksheet

Module 1 - 76
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

38
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Microwave Instrument Functional Diagram: Link to IG-

IG-XL

Module 1 - 77
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Assigning RF Ports in the IG-

IG-XL Channel Map Worksheet

Channel Map sheet in IG-XL maps

to CurrentChannelMap.txt file:
(DibChannel and Signal Name)

Module 1 - 78
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

39
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Level Ranging:

• MWReceiver.AmplitudeExpected VBT syntax controls the MW receiver

gain. This will be discussed later in the class. However, please NOTE:

9 CAUTION: DAMAGE MAY OCCUR to the MWPM LNA and or

MWMM RF amplifier if the power at the input is more than
10dB above the programmed “expected” level!!!

9 LNA Paths (MWPM LNA and MWMM RF AMP) can be damaged

by powers > -10 dBm. Users must program expected received
power levels accurately and consider the TOTAL POWER
within the 6 GHz MW Receiver bandwidth.

9 There is NO protection provided at the LNA input.

Module 1 - 79
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver VBT Programming

Dim pinname As String ' could be a list of pins

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).AmplitudeExpected = -30 ' in dBm -150 to +20 (check .min, .max)

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).CenterFrequency = 1000000000# ' in Hz, 50 MHz to 6 GHz
thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).IFFrequency = 20000000# ' in Hz, 50kHz to 40 MHz (check .Min, .max)
thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).IFFilter = 40000000# ' in Hz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 40 MHz are relevant
thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).Capture.SampleRate = 100000000# ' 3.125 MHz to 100 MHz
thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).Capture.SampleSize = 10000 ' max 4 Msamples

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupNormal
‘ also can choose tlMWGainSetupLowDistortion or tlMWGainSetupLowNoise

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).Connect See next page for

WITH/END WITH
' Note: Multiplexer can only connect one pin construct
' and the receiver can only connect to one mux.

' If the program has multiple sites sharing the same port module,
' then the connections and triggers must be serialized.

Module 1 - 80
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

40
Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver VBT Programming: Setup and Capture example

With TheHdw.MWReceiver.Pins(receiverpin). ' set up MWReceiver

.AmplitudeExpected = receiverRFpower
.CenterFrequency = receiverRFfreq
.IFFrequency = receiverIFfreq
.IFFilter = iffilter_freq
.capture.SampleRate = sample_rate
.capture.SampleSize = num_samps
. GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupNormal ' default
.Connect

' Add DSPWave to store capture

.Waveforms.Add (“DSPwave_capture”)

' Read back the MW Receiver calfactor : consider doing this on first run
dB_RXGain =.CalibrateSystemGain(receiverRFfreq)

' Start the capture

.Waveforms.Trigger (“DSPwave_capture”)
End With

Module 1 - 81
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Gain Mode Setup

• Normal Mode (DEFAULT setting):

Port Module LNA switched at lower programmed power levels, compromise between
noise and distortion.

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupNormal

• Low Distortion:
Preference for directional coupler paths, fewer amplifiers are switched in, lowest
distortion with a higher noise floor.

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupLowDistortion

• Low Noise Mode:

Preference for LNA, lowest noise with higher distortion at high power levels.

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupLowNoise

Module 1 - 82
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

41
Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Gain Mode Setup

• The MWMM RF AMP switching is based on the power level at the MWMM input, not the
instrument input.

• As a result, the exact power level at which the MWMM RF Amp is turned on and will vary from
system to system depending on the gain of the receive path preceding the MWMM.

• Typically, the MWMM input power will be about 26dB less than the instrument “expected” input
power level when the Port Module LNA is on.

• In “Normal” mode, the MWMM RF Amp can be expected to switch on for expected power levels:

– below about +4 dBm (-22 dBm + 26 dB) with the MWPM LNA off.
– below about -31.5 dBm (-22 dBm + -9.5 dB) with the MWPM LNA on.
– These values will vary by a few dB from system to system and also over frequency.

Module 1 - 83
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver RF Gain Setup

(Channels 3.osp1, 3.osp2, 3.osp3, 3.osp4)
MODE
PM LNA OFF 0 dBm PM LNA OFF
MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

LOW DISTORTION
-19 dBm

PM LNA OFF PM LNA OFF

MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

NEUTRAL
+ 6 dBm

PM LNA OFF
MM AMP ON PM LNA OFF
MM AMP OFF

LOW NOISE
• MW Port Module (PM) + 6 dBm
• MW Measure Module (MM)
Note: all input power levels in the above tables are at the DIB plane
Module 1 - 84
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

42
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver RF Gain Setup

( Channels 4.osp1, 4.osp2, 4.osp3, 4.osp4)
MODE
PM LNA ON PM LNA ON PM LNA OFF 0 dBm PM LNA OFF
MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

LOW DISTORTION
-56.5 dBm -40dBm - 19 dBm

PM LNA ON PM LNA OFF PM LNA OFF

MM AMP ON MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

NEUTRAL
-35dBm +6 dBm

PM LNA ON PM LNA ON PM LNA OFF PM LNA OFF

MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

LOW NOISE
• MW Port Module (PM) -31.5 dBm -15dBm +6 dBm
• MW Measure Module (MM)
Note: all input power levels in the above tables are at the DIB plane
Module 1 - 85
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver RF Gain Setup

( TCM Channels 3.osp5, 3.osp6, 4.osp5)
MODE
PM LNA ON PM LNA ON PM LNA OFF 0 dBm PM LNA OFF
MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

LOW DISTORTION
-52.5 dBm -36 dBm -15 dBm

PM LNA ON PM LNA OFF PM LNA OFF

MM AMP ON MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

NEUTRAL
-31dBm +10dBm

PM LNA ON PM LNA ON PM LNA OFF PM LNA OFF

MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF MM AMP ON MM AMP OFF

LOW NOISE
• MW Port Module (PM) -27.5 dBm -11dBm +10dBm
• MW Measure Module (MM)
Note: all input power levels in the above tables are at the DIB plane
Module 1 - 86
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

43
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver Gain Readback

• Use VBT readback command to get the receiver gain:

‘single frequency
Dim gain As Double
gain = thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).CalibrateSystemGain(rffreq)

• Call CalibrateSystemGain with the same setup as the capture:

9 The system performs an internal calibration using the MWSource and an internal
loopback path to the MW Receiver.
9 On most runs, the system will use cached values when the instruments are set up.
9 The CalibrateSystemGain for all frequency points and power levels used in the test
program can be done once on “first run” or as needed by the user.

Module 1 - 87
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver VBT: Handling Waveforms Pseudo-

code

• DSPWaves contain the digitizer data holding the captured data:

‰ Associate a label with each capture with an arbitrary, unique “string.”

‰ The label is used to associate the trigger event with the DSPWave object that holds
the data.
‰ Trigger the MWReceiver using the .Trigger command.

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).Waveforms.Add ("my_capture") ' create a label

thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).Waveforms.Trigger ("my_capture") ' make the capture

‰ Assign the capture to a DSPWave.

' capwave is assigned to the DSP procedure for processing on the G4.
Dim capwave as DSPWave

Set capwave =
thehdw.MWReceiver.pins(pinname).Waveforms("my_capture").DSPWave.pin(pinname).Value(site)

Module 1 - 88
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

44
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver VBT: Handling Waveforms

• For multisite (in addition to setting up IG-XL appropriately ...)

Public Function MwMultiSiteTest(ByVal pin As String, ByVal caplabel As String, _

Pseudo-
ByVal settle_msec As Double, _ code
Byval DSPWaveName As String)
' serially connect and trigger the Microwave Receiver.
' connect MWSource OR VHFAC source serially as well
'
Dim Status As tlLoopStatus, site As Long
Dim captime As Double, result As Long
Dim overall_result As Long
Dim first_site As Long

overall_result = TL_SUCCESS
With thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin)
captime = .capture.SampleSize.value / .capture.SampleRate.value
End With

Module 1 - 89
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver VBT: Multisite (Microwave serial triggering)

Status = theexec.Sites.SelectFirst Pseudo-
first_site = theexec.Sites.SelectedSite code

While Status <> loopDone

site = theexec.Sites.SelectedSite
SETUP MWSource OR VHFAC SRC
thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin).Connect (SETUP MWReceiver + ReadBack System Gain)
thehdw.Wait settle_msec / 1000#
thehdw.SettleWait 0.1
thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin).Waveforms.Trigger caplabel
' the next line not needed if MWReceiverDSPWave test element connected the capture label to
' the procedure DSPWave variable
thevars(DSPWaveName, site) =
thehdw.MWReceiver(pin).Waveforms(caplabel).DSPWave.pin(pin).value(site)
result = wait_capture_complete(pin, captime * 1000# * 3#)
Status = theexec.Sites.SelectNext(Status)
Wend
disconnect MWSource OR VHFAC SRC and MWReceiver site
End Function

Module 1 - 90
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

45
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver: DSP Functions

• DSPWave data is initially stored in the DSP module on the RF1 board.

• A DspProcedure call from the Test Procedure is used to make the calculation using the
FLEX DSP VBT code.

• The captured DSPWave is normally (by default) operated on to calculate the necessary
measurement(s) using the on-board G4 processor for maximum throughput.

• Captured data can be moved from the G4 to the host computer where the FLEX DSP VBT
code can be executed on the host. This capability is be discussed in more detail later in
this module.

Module 1 - 91
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ MWReceiver: DSP Functions

• When running a DspProcedure on the G4, the system hardware and control is not visible
in the on-board DSP environment. (call such as theHdw.MWSource … is not allowed)

• When running on the G4, all DIB hardware, tester hardware, setups, or instrument
control must be done either before or after the DspProcedure runs. (Control goes back
and forth between Host computer and Embedded System processor.)

Module 1 - 92
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

46
Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ DspProcedure example code segment: Calculate the RF power

from a captured DSPWave
Pseudo code – coded example to
follow a few slides further.
‘ get the resolution bandwidth (Fres)
‘ Fres = CDbl(sample_rate/num_samps) ‘ Fs and N must match the capture
Fres = DSPwave_capture.FrequencyResolution ‘ or use this to read it from the
‘ DSPWave.
' get the bin number where Fc will show up:
‘ Fc will be at the receiver IF frequency assuming Fc is what you want to measure
bin = receiverIFfreq / Fres

Z = 50# ‘ assume a 50 ohm system

amp = DSPwave_capture.Spectrum.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin)

‘ since there is no Log10 operator in VB, we need to convert from Logn

Power_out = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * amp * amp / (2 * Z)) - dB_RxGain

‘ plot the captured wave on the WaveScope

DSPwave_capture.plot (“Captured Wave”) ‘ For debug on host

Module 1 - 93
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ LOG10 conversion in VBT

Pseudo code – coded example to

Z = 50 ' ohms follow a few slides further.

amp = DSPwave_capture.Spectrum.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin)
' return volts peak

Power_out = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * amp * amp / (2 * Z)) - dB_RxGain

‘ factor 1000 is to convert watts to milliwatts

‘ 2 in denominator is to convert Vpk2 to Vrms2
‘ Z in ohms converts Vrms2 to power in watts ( E2/R)
‘ Since there is no log10( ) function in VB we can use:
‘ 10/Log(10) prefactor that produces 10 log10(power in milliwatts) = dBm
‘ dB_RxGain is the MW receiver cal factor read in the MW receiver set-up and
‘ capture function.

Module 1 - 94
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

47
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ There is no Log10 operator in VB, so we need to do a ln conversion:

From Math:

10 log 10 ( x ) = 10
ln( x ) ln( x ) = 2.303 log 10 ( x )
ln( 10 ) ln (10 ) = 2.303 × 1

In VB log(x) is ln (x) so:

10 10
ln( x ) log( x )
ln( 10 ) log( 10 )

Hence the VBT code is derived to compute PdBm:

PdBm = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log( power in milliwatts )

Module 1 - 95
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - Debug Displays

¾ Microwave Logical Instruments Debug Displays

MWSource, MWReceiver, MWModulated Source connections diagrams and parameters settings

Module 1 - 96
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

48
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - Debug Displays

¾ Microwave Physical Board Level Display

Port Module connections diagrams and parameters settings, bias tees …

Module 1 - 97
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾IG-XL MW Source and Receiver Measurements:

• RF testing in IG-XL using the FLEX microwave instruments follow the same construct of the
concepts presented in the FLEX Basic Programming course. (See the FLEX MW Class
Assumptions at the beginning of this module.)

• To add a test, the DUT pins and channel assignments must be defined in:

‰ Pin Map worksheet

‰ Channel Map worksheet

• Items must also be added to the appropriate IG-XL worksheets in:

‰ Flow Table worksheet

‰ Test Instances worksheet
‰ Test Procedures worksheet

Module 1 - 98
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

49
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ IG-XL MW Source and Receiver Measurements

• At the time of this publication, Test Procedures are required since DspProcedure
calls must be made from the Procedure Development Environment.

• For RF tests that require Test Procedures (i.e., DspProcedures), a minimum of 3

test elements are often used:

‰ VBT Element
‰ DSP Element
‰ Limits Element

Module 1 - 99
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Basic IG-XL RF Source and Power Measurement

• Assuming that the DUT is powered up and operating, the primary steps for sourcing and measuring
an RF signal are:

Step 1: Set up and connect the MW source to the DUT input port.
Set up and connect the MW receiver to the DUT output port.
Read back the MWReceiver cal factor.
Capture the DUT (LNA) output signal in a DSPWave.

Step 2: Run a DSP procedure to extract and calculate the DUT output power
from the DSPWave captured in Step 1 considering the receiver cal
factor.

Step 3: Compare the measured output power to acceptable limits.

Module 1 - 100
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

50
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Step 1: Set up and connect the MW source to the DUT input port

• Use a single VBT Function

to:
9 Set up and control
the DUT, DIB, etc.
9 Set the MW Source
9 Set up and Capture
the signal.

• Enter the function call to

the MW source, MW
receiver, and capture
VBT Function.

• Input the appropriate

variable names.

Module 1 - 101
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Step 1: VBT Source and Capture Function

Function MWSrcReceiveTest(ByVal sample_rate As Long, ByVal capsize As Long, _
ByVal Receive_Pin As String, ByVal RF_Frequency As Double, _
ByVal Input_Power As Double, ByVal Receiver_Level As Double, _
ByVal IF_Frequency As Double, ByVal IF_Filter As Double, _
ByVal Source_Pin As String, ByRef RecvGain As Double, _
ByRef capturename As String) As Long

Dim PLD As IPinListData

Dim thisSite As Long

' Set up MW Source

thehdw.MWSource.Pins(Source_Pin).Frequency = RF_Frequency
thehdw.MWSource.Pins(Source_Pin).Amplitude = Input_Power
thehdw.MWSource.Pins(Source_Pin).Connect

' Set up MW receiver

With thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(Receive_Pin)
.AmplitudeExpected = Receiver_Level
.CenterFrequency = RF_Frequency
.IFFrequency = IF_Frequency
.IFFilter = IF_Filter
.capture.SampleRate = sample_rate
.capture.SampleSize = capsize
.Connect
.Waveforms.Add ("src-recv")
.Waveforms.Trigger ("src-recv")
End With

Module 1 - 102
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

51
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Step 1: (Continued) Source and Capture Function

Set PLD = thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(Receive_Pin).Waveforms.Item("src-recv").DSPWave

'Get receiver system gain

Call readback_receiver_gain(Receive_Pin, RF_Frequency, RecvGain)

For thisSite = 0 To theexec.Sites.ExistingCount - 1

If theexec.Sites.site(thisSite).Active = True Then
thevars(capturename, Site) = PLD.Pins(Receive_Pin).value(Site)
End If
Next thisSite

'Disconnect MWSource, MWReceiver

thehdw.MWSource.Pins(Source_Pin).Disconnect
thehdw.MWReceiver(Receive_Pin).Disconnect

End Function

Module 1 - 103
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ STEP 2: Add a DspProcedure in VBT to calculate the RF

power from the captured DSPWave

Public Function mw_power(ByVal capture As DSPWave, _

ByVal IFFreq As Double, _
ByVal recv_gain As Double, _
ByRef power_dBm As Double) As Long

Dim bin As Long, fres As Double, ampl As Double

fres = capture.FrequencyResolution
bin = IFFreq / fres

ampl = capture.Spectrum.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin)
power_dBm = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * ampl * ampl / (2 * 50)) - recv_gain
capture.Plot "MW Capture Signal“ ‘For debug when running on host computer

mw_power = 0 ' TL_SUCCESS

End Function

Module 1 - 104
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

52
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ STEP 2: Add a DspProcedure in VBT to calculate the RF

power from the captured DSPWave

• Insert a DspProcedure
Test Element in TDE.

• Enter the function call

to the DspProcedure.

• Input the appropriate

variable names.

Module 1 - 105
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Step 2: (Continued) Steps for using the DSP Procedure

Element

• After creating the DspProcedure Function in VBT and inserting the DspProcedure Element in
TDE, enter the appropriate information using the TDE Element Editor. Select options, etc. as
follows:

‰Select the DSP Procedure Name from the drop-down list.

‰Set the Run Mode:
9 Automatic - Runs the procedure on the on-board G4 processor. Usually used
for production.
o Host-Thread - Discussed in the FLEX IG-XL Help
9 Host-Debug - Moves the data from the G4 to the host computer and runs the
DSP procedure on the host computer. Used for debug to step through the DSP
code and plot the DSPWaves using the WaveScope.
‰Type in the appropriate variable names and values.

Module 1 - 106
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

53
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Compare the measured output power to acceptable limits

‰ Add a Limits element in TDE.

‰ Enter the appropriate Test Limits, TNames, measurement variables, etc. in the Limits
element.

Module 1 - 107
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Compare the measured output power to acceptable limits

• Input the appropriate

variable names and
values.

• Insert a Limits Element in TDE.

Module 1 - 108
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

54
 Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Useful VBT Syntax:

Dim outWave As DSPWave

outWave.FileExport (".\captured_data.wav")

Dim inWave As DSPWave

Call inWave.FileImport (".\captured_data.wav")

If (theexec.TesterMode <> testModeOffline) Then

End If

Module 1 - 109
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Microwave Instruments - MWSource and MWReceiver

¾ Access to MWReceiver IF
Physical Board-
Board-Level Debug Display
Name Signal Pin Ground Pin

User_Receiver_IF_Output_Access D8 C8

User_Digitizer_IF_Input_Access A3 B3

Additional filtering between the MWReceiver IF stage and

the Digitizer input can be added on a DIB by accessing the
forementioned Pogo pins.

Module 1 - 110
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

55
 Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in the class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC Digitizer (optional – run latter in the class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 111
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ Auxiliary (AUX) Connections to BBAC and VHFAC Digitizers

TH Slot 1
BBAC DIB Slot 1
DIB Slot 2

TH Slot 2
MW RF1
DIB Slot 3
DIB Slot 4

MW DIB Slot 5
Aux connections

TH Slot 3 RF2 DIB Slot 6

Cables

BBAC
DIG

RF IF

MW
LO
DIG

VHFAC
DIB Slot 21
TH Slot 11
VHFAC DIB Slot 22 See MW instrument debug
display for more detail.
DIG

NOTE: microFLEX test head uses only left hemisphere

Module 1 - 112
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

56
 Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ Auxiliary (AUX) Connections to BBAC and VHFAC Digitizers

When sourcing from the MWSource and capturing with the BBAC or VHFAC digitizer, the
BBACCapture and VHFACCapture are used by the MWReceiver.

The MWReceiver instrument can send its retrieved signals simultaneously to the MW on-board
digitizer, BBAC Capture instrument, VHFAC Capture instrument, or any combination of them. That
is, the MWReceiver capture always goes to the MW on-board digitizer. However, you can select to
send the signals to MW on-board digitizer only, or to the ON/OFF Board IF Capture instruments
simultaneously.

Note: isolation exists between digitizers, there is no mutual interaction.

Module 1 - 113
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ Cable mapping and Tester Configuration Files
<CABLE MW 1>
#AUX Source connections
#Start Channel Destination Channel Instrument
#<Cage>.<DIBSlot>.<Chan> <Cage>.<CageSlot>.<Connector>
TH1.2.SRCPOS1 MW1.0.VHDM26 BBACSource #BBACSource 1
#TH1.2.SRCPOS2 MW1.0.VHDM27 BBACSource #BBACSource 2
#TH1.22.src0apos MW1.0.VHFIN1 VHFACSource #VHFACSource 1
#TH1.22.src1apos MW1.0.VHFIN2 VHFACSource #VHFACSource 2

#AUX Capture connections

#Start Channel Destination Channel Instrument
#<Cage>.<THSlot>.<Connector> <Cage>.<DIBSlot>.<Chan>
TH1.3.AUX4 TH1.2.CAPPOS1 BBACCapture #BBACCapture 1
TH1.3.AUX5 TH1.22.cap0apos VHFACCapture #VHFACCapture 1

The cable mapping information is used by the system to recognize the interconnections between MW
instrument and AUX instruments and is defined in the configuration file
(SimulatedConfig.txt OR TesterConfig.txt). The tester configuration file must be edited manually to
match physical configuration.

Module 1 - 114
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

57
 Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures
¾ Debug Displays (cont’
(cont’d)

Aux connection to BBAC Digitizer

Aux connection to VHFAC Digitizer

Module 1 - 115
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ Debug Displays (cont’
(cont’d)

Module 1 - 116
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

58
 Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ VBT Syntax

‘Set Up AUX Capture Instrument

Pseudo-
code

…
‘Connect AUX Capture instrument
Thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(“Pin”).AUXIFConnect “Label_of_CaptureInstrument“

‘Process AUX capture data …

…

‘Disconnect AUX Capture instrument

Thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(“Pin”).AUXIFDisConnect

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
“Label_of_CaptureInstrument” is one of the following:

“BBACCapture” - MWReceiver retrieved data goes to MW on-board digitizer and BBACapture

“VHFACCapture” -MWReceiver retrieved data goes to MW on-board digitizer and VHFACapture
“All” – MWReceiver retrieved data goes to MW on-board digitizer,BBACCapture and VHFACapture

Module 1 - 117
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ VBT Syntax and code example (MWReceiver Capture)

‘ MWSource Setup
thehdw.MWSource.Pins(pin1).Amplitude = -10
thehdw.MWSource.Pins(pin1).Frequency = 60000000
thehdw.MWSource.Pins(pin1).Connect
‘ MWReceiver Setup and Capture
With thehdw.MWReceiver(pin2)
.AmplitudeExpected = -25
.Waveforms.Add "LabelMWRcv"
.IFFilter = 40000000
.capture.SampleRate = 50000000
.capture.SampleSize = 100
.Connect
.IFFrequency = 5000000
.GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupLowNoise
.CenterFrequency = 60000000
.AmplitudeExpected = -15
.Waveforms.Trigger "LabelMWRcv"
End With
thehdw.Raw.MWdig.Pins(pin2).WaitForCaptureDone
Set capMWRcv = Nothing
Set pldMWRcv = thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin2).Waveforms.Item("LabelMWRcv").DSPWave
Set capMWRcv = pldMWRcv.Pins(pin2).value(0)

Module 1 - 118
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

59
 Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ VBT Syntax and code example (VHFAC Capture)

'VHFAC Setup
thehdw.VHFACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals.Add "VHFACCap_from_MWRcv"
thehdw.VHFACCapture.Pins(pin2).Waveforms.Load ("VHFACCap_from_MWRcv")
With thehdw.VHFACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals("VHFACCap_from_MWRcv")
.SampleSize = 100
.SampleRate = 50000000
.VoltageRange = 2
.LowPass.Bypass = False
.LowPass.value = 50000000
.Termination = tlVHFACCaptureTerminationTerm50
.CaptureType = tlVHFACCaptureSignalsCaptureTypeNormal
.LoadSettings
End With

‘ AUXIFConnect
thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin2).AUXIFConnect "VHFACCapture"
Debug.Print thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin2).ConnectedAUXIF

'VHFAC Capture
thehdw.VHFACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals("VHFACCap_from_MWRcv").Trigger

Dim dataCap As New DSPWave

Set dataCap =
thehdw.VHFACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals("VHFACCap_from_MWRcv").DSPWave.pin(pin2).value(0)
Module 1 - 119
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Alternate Digitizer Captures

¾ VBT Syntax and code example (BBAC Capture)
'BBAC Setup
thehdw.BBACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals.Add "BBACCap_from_MWRcv“

With thehdw.BBACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals("BBACCap_from_MWRcv")
.SampleSize = 100
.SampleRate = 50000000
.VoltageRange = 2
.LoadSettings
End With

'AUXIFConnect
thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin2).AUXIFConnect "BBACCapture"
Debug.Print thehdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pin2).ConnectedAUXIF

'BBAC Capture
thehdw.BBACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals("BBACCap_from_MWRcv").Trigger

Dim dataCap2 As New DSPWave

Set dataCap2 =
thehdw.BBACCapture.Pins(pin2).Signals("BBACCap_from_MWRcv").DSPWave.pin(pin2).value(0)

Module 1 - 120
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

60
 Module 1: Labs

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels, Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Demo Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in the class)
• Demo Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in the class)
¾ Module Review

Module 1 - 121
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

LAB Sessions Introduction

Overview of Using the Lab Guide

Overview of Lab Logistics

FLEX microFLEX
LAB TIME

PN 553-401-78 MRP- Rev 002

61
 Lab 1_1 Src_Recv using thru

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-78 MRP- Rev 002

Lab 1_1 Src_Recv using thru

TEST: SRC_RECV
LOOPBACK CABLE

Loopback
RF_in(Thur_in)ÆSource Pin RF_out(Thru_out)ÆReceivePin
3.osp2 4.osp2

MWSource MWReceiver
RF_FrequencyÆ60MHz RF X IF .AmplitudeExpectedÆReceiver_level
Input_powerÆpower_in=(-32) Ærecv_level=(-25)
.CenterFrequency=RF_freq=60MHz
LO
IFF_Freq=IF_Freq=5MHz

LO
Set by
X RF
IFFilter=40MHz
Fs=100MHz=sample_rate
RF_freq=60MHz
N=10000=capsize
system
Capture name=cap
IF
5MHz

LAB TIME

Module 1 - 124
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

62
 Module 1: Labs
Lab 1_1 Summary
¾ Lab 1.1: Source and Receive Loop-
Loop-back

• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions and Student Lab framework

• Summary:

Using the MW Lab 1.1.xls as a starting point, write a VBT routine to connect the MWSource
to an OSP port, through a cable to a second OSP port. Capture and measure the signal
using the MWReceiver.

– Measure the power in dBm using the provided routines, and verify that you measure
the same power that the MWSource is producing.

– Lab 1.1.1 Estimated time: 45 minutes

– Lab 1.1.2 Estimated time: 20 minutes
– Lab 1.1.3 Estimated time: 20 minutes

Module 1 - 125
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Labs
Optional Lab 1_2 Summary
¾ Lab 1.2: Triggering MW Capture with Digital pattern
(Optional demo lab to be done latter in the class)
y Summary:

Building from of Lab 1.1 and using the materials taught in the slides on
RF Event Triggers, write a test program using the
DIB_DUT_EVENT_TRIGGER line (Pogo pin C36) to trigger a MW capture with a Digital pin
from a pattern.

- Estimated time: 60 minutes

- Solution is in Test “MWRecvDigTrigTest” in program:

FLEX Uwave Class Labs Mod1-Mod2 Solutions .xls

Module 1 - 126
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

63
 Module 1: Labs
Optional Lab 1_3 Summary
¾ Lab 1.3: Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer
(Optional demo lab to be done latter in the class)
y Summary:

Building from of Lab 1.1 and using the materials taught in the slides on
using alternate digitizers, write a program to source a signal using the
MWSource and capture it with the BBAC and VHFAC digitizer without
using a pattern.

- Estimated time: 30 minutes

- Solution is in Test “AUXConnectTest” in program:

FLEX Uwave Class Labs Mod1-Mod2 Solutions .xls

Module 1 - 127
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 1: Review

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Assumptions and Conventions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX System Overview and RF Concepts
• System Architecture Overview: IG-XL/Microwave and Source/Receive Instruments
• RF Concepts and RF Test Principles: Terms and Definitions
¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave System Architecture
• Basic System Architecture, Test Head Boards and Connections
¾ Microwave Instruments: MWSource and MWReceiver
• Microwave Source (MWSource) Introduction and VBT Programming
• Microwave Receiver (MWReceiver) Introduction
• Physical Instruments, DIB Interface, Software Connections (Pins, Channels,
Configurations …)
• VBT Programming (MWReceiver and Loopback Measurement Example)
¾ Alternate Digitizer Captures
• Capturing MW Signal with BBAC Digitizer
• Capturing MW Signal with VHFAC Digitizer
¾ Labs (Source/Receiver)
• Lab 1.1 Source and Receive Loop-back
• Lab 1.2 Triggering MW Capture with Digital Pattern (optional – run latter in the class)
• Lab 1.3 Auxiliary Connection to BBAC/VHFAC digitizer (optional – run latter in the class)
¾ Module Review
Module 1 - 128
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

64
 Module 1 Review

¾ On completion of this module the student should be able to:

9 Understand basic concepts related to Microwave and RF power measurements.

9 Understand the FLEX Microwave System Architecture at a high level.
9 Understand functionalities and basic syntax of MWReceiver and MWSource
instruments and the Microwave Port Module.
9 Develop IG-XL code on the FLEX using procedure elements, VBT code, interpose
functions and DSP procedures to perform RF power measurements.
9 Debug the test programs using the WaveScope and FLEX debug tools running on
the host computer.
9 Run the test programs using the MW on-board G4 processor to get pass/fail
results.

Module 1 - 129
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

65
M O D U L E 2

Module

2
Module 2 covers:

Gain
1dB Compression
IMD/IP2/IP3
Noise Figure
Phase Noise
 Module 2: Agenda

¾ Module Objectives

¾ RF Gain
• Gain Definitions
• Gain Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Simulator Lab 2.2: “Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.2: “ Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”

¾ 1 dB Compression
• 1 dB Compression Definition
• 1 dB Compression Testing Methodology

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3

• Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) Definition
• Intercept Point (IP2) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”
• Tester Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”

Module 2 - 1
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

Module 2: Agenda (cont’

(cont’d)

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3 (Continued)

• Intercept Point (IP3) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”
• Tester Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”

¾ Noise Figure
• Noise Figure Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”
• Tester Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”

¾ Phase Noise
• Phase Noise Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”
• Tester Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”

¾ Module 2 Review

Module 2 - 2
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

1
 Module 2: Objectives

™ Module Objectives

¾ RF Gain
• Gain Definitions
• Gain Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Simulator Lab 2.2: “Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.2: “ Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”

¾ 1 dB Compression
• 1 dB Compression Definition
• 1 dB Compression Testing Methodology

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3

• Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) Definition
• Intercept Point (IP2) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”
• Tester Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”

Module 2 - 3
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

Module 2: Objectives

¾ On completion of this module the student should be

able to:

• Use the FLEX/microFLEX MW instruments to perform RF Gain, 1dB

Compression, Intermodulation Products (IP2 and IP3), Noise Figure (NF),
and Phase Noise (PN) Measurement Tests.
• Develop IG-XL code on the FLEX/microFLEX using VBT code and DSP
procedures to perform RF Measurement Tests.
• Debug test programs using the WaveScope and FLEX/microFLEX Debug
Tools running on the host computer.
• Run the test programs using the MW on-board G4 processor to get pass
fail results.

Module 2 - 4
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

2
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Module Objectives

™ RF Gain
• Gain Definitions
• Gain Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Simulator Lab 2.2: “Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.2: “ Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”

¾ 1 dB Compression
• 1 dB Compression Definition
• 1 dB Compression Testing Methodology

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3

• Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) Definition
• Intercept Point (IP2) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”
• Tester Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”

Module 2 - 5
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Gain Definitions

Pout
G power =
Pin
GdB = 10 log (G power ) = 20 log (Vout / Vin )

GdBtotal = GdB1 + GdB2 + GdB3 + . . .

GdB1 = 12dB GdB2 = 9dB GdB3 = 9dB

input GdBtotal = 30dB

Module 2 - 6
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

3
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Gain Definitions (Continued)

• Measured gain values are usually mathematically adjusted to account for signal
path losses:
9 Direct measurement of signal losses and scalar compensation to adjust
computed gain values.
9 Mathematical compensation by simulation or estimation.
9 By accounting for the amount of source and load power reflections
(Reflection coefficients: GAMMA, S-Parameters).
9 By a combination of these.

• Gain can be defined several ways, depending on whether or not the reflected
power and DUT input and output impedance matching and circuit losses need to
be considered in the calculations.

Module 2 - 7
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Gain Types

• Power Gain (Gp) is the ratio of the power delivered to a load to the power
delivered by the source.

• Transducer Gain (Gt) is the ratio of output power delivered to a load to the
maximum power available from the source.

• Available Gain (Ga) is the ratio of power available to the load to the power
available from the source.

• Insertion Gain (Gi) is the ratio of the power delivered to a load with a
device inserted between the source and load to the power delivered with the
source connected directly between the source and the load.

• For further details refer to: http://www.maurymw.com/support/FAQs/faqs/faq9.htm

Module 2 - 8
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

4
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾Gain Types

Power Available from Source Power Available to Load

DUT

PL2
G • Power Gain (Gp) =
PS PS
PL2
PL2
• Transducer Gain (Gt) =
Power Available from Source
SOURCE LOAD

Without DUT
Power Available to Load
• Available Gain (Ga) =
PS Power Available from Source

PL1
PL2
• Insertion Gain (Gi) =
SOURCE LOAD PL1

Module 2 - 9
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Gain Testing
• Measuring the gain of a device such as a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) involves the
basic steps covered in the loopback test in Module 1 to source the input signal,
capture the output, and calculate the results.

• Assuming that the DUT is powered up and operating, the primary steps for
setting up IG-XL and measuring the gain of an LNA are as follows:

Step 1: Set up and connect the MW source to the LNA input port.

Step 2: Set up and connect the MW receiver to the LNA output port, read the
MW receiver cal factor, and capture the LNA output signal in a
DSPWave.

Step 3: Run a DSP procedure to extract and calculate the LNA output power
from the DSPWave captured in Step 2 considering the receiver cal factor.
GdB = PdBm( out ) − PdBm( in )
Step 4: Compare the LNA gain to acceptable limits.

Module 2 - 10
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

5
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 1: Set up and connect the MW source to the LNA input

port
• Create a VBT function to set up and connect the MW Source consisting of the
following syntax:

Option Explicit
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Public Function setup_MW_CW_source(ByVal sourcepin As String, _

ByVal sourcepower As Double, _
ByVal sourcefrequency As Double) As Long
With TheHdw.MWSource.Pins(sourcepin)
.Amplitude = sourcepower
.Frequency = sourcefrequency
.Connect
End With
End Function

Module 2 - 11
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 1: (Continued) Set up and connect the MW source to

the LNA input port
• Click the ellipsis to invoke TDE:
• Create a LNA_GAIN_TP Test
Procedure in the Procedures
Worksheet.

Module 2 - 12
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

6
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 1: (Continued) Set up and connect the MW source to

the LNA input port

• In TDE, add a VBT

Test Element.

• Enter the function

call to the MW source
set up VBT Function.

• Assign appropriate
variable names.

Module 2 - 13
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 2: Set up the MW Receiver and capture the LNA

output signal

• Create a MW receiver VBT Function to:

‰ Set up the MW receiver RF parameters.

‰ Set up the MW receiver IF parameters.
‰ Set up the MW receiver DSPWave capture parameters, label.
‰ Connect the MW receiver to the LNA output pin.
‰ Read back MW receiver calfactor used for DSP procedure power
calculations.
‰ Trigger the capture.

Module 2 - 14
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

7
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 2: (Continued) Set up the MW Receiver and capture

the LNA output signal

• Create a MW receiver VBT Function:

With TheHdw.MWReceiver .Pins(receiverpin)

.AmplitudeExpected = expectedpower
.CenterFrequency = receiverRFfreq
.IFFrequency = receiverIFfreq
.IFFilter = iffilter_freq
.capture.SampleRate = sample_rate
.capture.SampleSize = num_samps
.Waveforms.Add (DSPwave_capture)
.Connect
dB_RXGain =.Pins(receiverpin).CalibrateSystemGain(receiverRFfreq)
.Waveforms.Trigger (DSPwave_capture)
End With

Module 2 - 15
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 2: (Continued) Set up the MW Receiver and capture

the LNA output signal

• Add a VBT Test Element

in TDE.

• Enter the function call to

the MW receiver set up
and capture Function.

• Assign appropriate
variable names.

Module 2 - 16
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

8
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ STEP 3: Run a DspProcedure to calculate the gain from the

captured DSPWave
• Create a DSP Function in VBT:
Pseudo-
code
‘ get the resolution bandwidth (Fres)
‘ Fres = CDbl(sample_rate / num_samps) ‘ Fs and N must match the capture
Fres = DSPwave_capture.FrequencyResolution ‘ or use this to read it from the
‘ captured DSPWave.
' get the bin number where Fc will show up:
‘ Fc will be at the receiver IF frequency assuming Fc is what you want to measure
bin = (receiverIFfreq / Fres)
Z = 50# ‘ assume a 50 ohm system
Set Mag = DSPwave_capture.FFT.ExtractMagnitude
amp = Mag.Element(bin)
Power_out = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * amp * amp / (2 * Z)) - dB_RxGain
Gain_result = Power _out – Power_in ‘return calculated gain value
‘ plot the captured wave on the WaveScope
DSPwave_capture.plot (“Captured Wave”) ‘ For debug on host

Module 2 - 17
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Step 3: (Continued) Run the DspProcedure to calculate the

gain from the captured DSPWave:

• Add a DspProcedure
Test Element in TDE.

• Enter the function call

to the DspProcedure.

• Assign appropriate
variable names.

Module 2 - 18
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

9
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ STEP 4: Compare Gain results to limits

• Add a Limits Element in TDE.

•Enter the appropriate Test Limits, TName, etc. in the Limits Element.
•Add the Gain_result variable name to the Limits Element Editor Results.
Module 2 - 19
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Add the Test Name in the Test Instances worksheet and

enter the Instance Type and Name

Module 2 - 20
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

10
 Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Invoke the LNA Test Instance editor and input the parameters

Module 2 - 21
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain

¾ Add the LNA Gain Test Flow to the Flow Table worksheet

• Set the Run options.

• Validate and run

the test!

Module 2 - 22
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

11
 Lab 2_1 LNA Gain

LAB TIME

PN 553-405-78 MRP-Rev002

July 2005

Lab 2_1 LNA Gain

LNA
TEST: LNA GAIN
+15v
gnd
RF_LNA_inÆSource Pin RF_LNA_outÆReceivePin
DIB power supply
3.osp1 4.osp1

MWSource MWReceiver
RF_FrequencyÆ900MHz RF X IF
.AmplitudeExpectedÆ
Input_power+Estimated_Gain_dB
Input_powerÆpower_in=(-20)
IFF_Freq=IF_Freq=1MHz
LO IFFilter=10MHz

X
Fs=12.5MHz=sample_rate
LO RF N=125000Æcapture_size=capsize
Set by RF_freq=900MHz Capture name=cap
system
.CenterFrequency=RF_Freq=900MHz
IF Estimated_gain=23
1MHz

LAB TIME

Module 2 - 24
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

12
 Module 2: RF Gain Lab 2_1 Summary

¾ Lab 2.1
• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions and Student Lab skeleton

path : \\xxx\LAB GUIDES\

Lab2_1 Instructions for LNA Gain.doc

• Summary: Add an IG-XL test to measure the gain of the LNA on the class DIB:
ƒ Use an input amplitude of -20dBm at 900MHz.
ƒ Assume the expected LNA gain is +23dB.

Estimated time: 30 minutes

LNA
LNAIn LNAOut

Coaxial cable Coaxial cable

DIB

Module 2 - 25
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 2_2 LNA Gain Sweep

LAB TIME

PN 553-405-78 MRP-Rev002

July 2005

13
 Lab 2_2 LNA Gain Sweep

LNA
TEST: LNA GAIN
SWEEP +15v
gnd
RF_LNA_inÆSource Pin RF_LNA_outÆReceivePin
DIB power supply
3.osp1 4.osp1

MWSource MWReceiver
RF_FrequencyÆ RF_freq
=100MHz to 4000MHz in
40 steps
RF X IF
.AmplitudeExpectedÆ
Input_power+Estimated_Gain_dB
IFF_Freq=IF_Freq=1MHz
Input_powerÆpower_in=(-20)
LO IFFilter=10MHz

X
Fs Æsample_rate =12.5MHz
LO RF
N=125000Æcapture_length=capsize
Set by RF_freq=100MHz Capture name=cap
system to 4000MHz in .CenterFrequency=RF_freq
IF 40 steps =100MHz to 4000MHz in
40 steps
1MHz

Estimated_gainÆ gain_estimate=23

LAB TIME

Module 2 - 27
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: RF Gain Lab 2_2 Summary

¾ Lab 2.2
• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions and Student Lab skeleton

path: \\xxx\LAB GUIDES\

Lab2_2 Instructions for LNA Gain Sweep.doc

• Summary: Using the LNA Gain Lab 2.1 as a baseline, add a frequency sweep to measure the
LNA gain from 100MHz to 4000MHz in 100MHz steps.

ƒ Use an input amplitude of -20dBm.

ƒ Hint: The following may be helpful:

9 Use the Waveforms.Trigger (“DSPWave_cap") in a source/capture loop.

9 Use capture.Next in a DSP measure loop.
9 Return the measured values from the DSP function in a DSPWave.
9 Use the returned DSPWave values indexed in the test Limits element.

Module 2 - 28
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

14
 Module 2: 1 dB Compression

¾ Module Objectives

¾ RF Gain
• Gain Definitions
• Gain Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Simulator Lab 2.2: “Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.2: “ Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”

™ 1 dB Compression
• 1 dB Compression Definition
• 1 dB Compression Testing Methodology

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3

• Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) Definition
• Intercept Point (IP2) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”
• Tester Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”

Module 2 - 29
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

Module 2: 1 dB Compression

¾ 1 dB Compression Definition

• As the power level applied to the device input is increased, a point is eventually
reached where the device will begin to go into saturation and become nonlinear.

• As the device approaches saturation, the gain will start to decrease.

• The point on the device gain slope where the gain falls to 1dB below the linear gain is
defined as the 1 dB compression point.

-1dB compression point

Pout

in
Ga

Pin

Module 2 - 30
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

15
 Module 2: 1 dB Compression

¾ 1 dB Compression testing can be performed by:

(characterization technique)

1. Measuring the device gain with an input power level where the device is expected to
be operating at a linear point on the power curve.
2. Sweeping or stepping the input power level within the expected out-of-compression
to into-compression range.
3. Measuring the gain value at each input power level.
4. Finding the input power where the device gain is 1dB less than the gain measured in
Step 1.
The 1dB compression point is generally reported as the input power level in dBm where
the 1dB compression point occurs.
¾

Module 2 - 31
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: 1 dB Compression

¾ Alternatively, 1 dB Compression can be tested by:

1. Measuring the gain at a predetermined linear operating point.

2. Measuring the gain at a point where the device is expected to be slightly out of
compression or just into compression.
3. Computing and comparing the gain difference between the linear gain power level
measured in Step 1 and the gain value in Step 2, where the Step 2 gain value should
be less than or equal to –1dB of the linear gain.

¾ Usually, this method is only used for production “go/no-go” testing

when test time is a major consideration.

Module 2 - 32
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

16
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Module Objectives

¾ RF Gain
• Gain Definitions
• Gain Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.1: “Measure DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Simulator Lab 2.2: “Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”
• Tester Lab 2.2: “ Sweep DUT (LNA) Gain”

¾ 1 dB Compression
• 1 dB Compression Definition
• 1 dB Compression Testing Methodology

™ IMD, IP2, IP3

• Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) Definition
• Intercept Point (IP2) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”
• Tester Lab 2.3: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP2”

Module 2 - 33
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) Definition:

• The linearity of an RF device can be determined by measuring how much distortion

the device generates when operating within its normal power range.

• Distortion can be measured by evaluating the power levels of the IMD products at the
device output.

Module 2 - 34
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

17
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ IMD testing is usually performed by applying a two-tone CW

signal where both tones are usually at equal power levels
applied simultaneously to the input of the device.
Pin
Device Input

Frequency
f1 f2

The Frequency separation of the RF tones is usually

determined by the bandwidth of the information channel:
Typical F2 – F1 offset= 100kHz

Module 2 - 35
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

(FLEX Gen4 Microwave)
Port Noise
Source
From Main Source1
Synthesizer Main
Coupler
RF I/Os
¾ MW Port Module “A”
¾ Add-Paths Connections OSP ports
:
2-Tone RF signals can be
generated using the MW
Port Module Add-Paths
Main
From Main Source2 Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports
Add-Paths
Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 2 - 36
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

18
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ 2-Tone RF signals can be generated using the MW Port Module Add-

Paths with the MW port multitone VBT syntax:

' set up low-side tone F1 using MW source1 (1)

With TheHdw.MWMultiToneSource.Pins(sourcepin).Tones(1)
.Frequency = F1_freq
.Amplitude = F1_power_level
End With

' set up high side tone F2 using MW source2 (2)

With TheHdw.MWMultiToneSource.Pins(sourcepin).Tones(2)
.Frequency = F2_freq
.Amplitude = F2_power_level
End With

TheHdw.MWMultiToneSource.Pins(sourcepin).Connect

Module 2 - 37
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ IP2 are theoretical operating points of a device where the power of the
fundamental signals and the power of the IMD products on the output are
equal.
¾ At the output of the device, the IP2 distortion products appear at 2f1, 2f2,
f1 + f2, and f2 - f1. IP2 measurements are usually made on the IMD
product at f1 + f2.

Device Output
Pout Pfund

2nd Order
IMD
P suppression

f
f2- 1 f1 f2 2f1 f
f1+ 2 2f2 Frequency
IP2 IMD IP2 IMD
product product

Module 2 - 38
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

19
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ The IMD can be determined by measuring the power levels of IMD products at
specific frequencies at the device output in the frequency domain.
¾ IMD can be quantified as a figure of merit corresponding to a point on the
gain/slope curve called an Intercept Point (IP).
¾ IP’s are measured at specific frequencies relative to the fundamental
frequencies defined by the order of distortion distributed throughout the
frequency spectrum where IP2 is the 2nd order IMD, IP3 is the 3rd order IMD,
and so forth.
¾ Once the IMD and fundamental signal power levels are known, the IP levels
can be calculated by applying them to the following Equation 1:

Psuppression
IPN = + Pfund Equation 1
N −1

Where:
N is the IP order: 2, 3, etc.
Psuppression = Pfund - PIMD

Module 2 - 39
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Given a power input to the device of –30dBm for each tone and an output spectrum
that yields the following result, IP2 can be calculated as follows using Equation 1:

Pout
Equation 1:
Device Output (gain = +9dB)
Psuppression
IPN = + Pfund -21dBm Pfund
N −1
IMD Psuppression
= 44dBm
44dBm -65dBm Pimod
IP2 = − 21dBm = 23dBm
1
*Where order N = 2 f2– f1 f1 f2 f1+ f2
Frequency
NOTE: IP2 can be either input referred (IIP2) or output referred (OIP2).

The example illustrated above is OIP2 since the input power is not considered in the
calculation.

Module 2 - 40
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

20
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ The power levels of the IP2 IMD products (F1 + F2 and F2 - F1) increase at a rate of 2dB for
each 1dB increase in fundamental power.
¾ In reality, the IP2 points can never be reached because the device goes into compression.

IP2

Pout
dB
Fundamental
-1dB compression point

1:1

2:1 2nd Order IMD

Product

Pin
dB

Module 2 - 41
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Perform IP testing just before the device begins to go into compression (well below the 1 dB
compression point). This is because the IMD power levels are much easier to measure since
they are usually well above the noise floor.

¾ If the input power levels are too high and the device begins to go into compression, errors
will result in the measurement.

¾ Likewise, if the input power levels are too low, the measurement accuracy and repeatability
may be unacceptable due to the separation between the IM power levels and the system
noise floor.

Module 2 - 42
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

21
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ In general, if the tester IMD products are -10 dB or more lower than the IMD
products generated by the device, the system will have minimal effect on the final
measurement.

¾ Set the frequency resolution Fres on the MWRECV digitizer as narrow as practical when
making IP measurements to lower the noise floor of the capture where:

Fres = Fs/N Where: Fs is the sample frequency

and N is the number of samples

Module 2 - 43
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ When doing IP testing, take care to ensure that the MW Receiver itself does not
generate a significant level of intermodulation products.

¾ Set the MW Receiver GainSetup to Low Distortion mode if possible to minimize the
affects of the MW receiver IP’s:

TheHdw.WMReceiver.Pins().GainSetup
GainSetup = tlMWGainSetupLowDistortion

tlMWGainSetupNormal Configures the Microwave Receiver instrument to its default

gain setup.

tlMWGainSetupLowNoise Configures the Microwave Receiver instrument gain for low

noise.
tlMWGainSetupLowDistortion Configures the Microwave Receiver instrument gain for low
distortion.

Module 2 - 44
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

22
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ MW Receiver Spectral Inversion

• The IF spectrum can be inverted in the capture if the MWReceiver RF input frequency is
below 200 MHz.

• When the spectrum is inverted, the MWReceiver uses a “high-side LO” to downconvert the
RF signal to the IF frequency.

• When this happens, the bin calculations will need to be accounted for when doing
frequency domain DSP calculations.

• The VBT statement:

TheHdw.MWReceiver.Pins(pinname).IsSpectrumReversed(RFFreq As Double) As Boolean

will report whether this reversal will happen for a given Frequency.

Module 2 - 45
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Spectral Inversion

When a “high-side LO” is used on a mixer, the downconverted RF signal

will actually appear inverted when doing spectral analysis in the IF
frequency domain.

Example:
• RF signal to measure, coming from the device: 100MHz
• IF signal programmed: 1MHz
• LO automatically programmed by the MWRECV: 100MHz + 1MHz = 101MHz
• Sum and Difference frequencies created are at LO + RF and LO - RF or 201MHz and
1MHz where the 201MHz signal is NOT inverted but the 1MHz signal is inverted
(symmetric about the LO)
101MHz
LO

100.0MHz 1MHz
RF IF

Module 2 - 46
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

23
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Spectral Inversion

Example:
• RF signal programmed: 100MHz
• IF signal programmed: 1MHz
• fLO automatically programmed by the MWRECV: 100MHz + 1MHz = 101MHz
• Sum and Difference frequencies are created at fLO + fRF (201MHz) and fLO - fRF
(1MHz) where the 201MHz signal is NOT inverted but the 1MHz signal is inverted.
• The 1MHz signal is low-pass filtered and the signal is captured by the digitizer.
• Since the 1MHz signal is inverted in the frequency domain, you need to account
for it when computing the bin number(s) for the frequency of interest.

Low-pass filter response

f 0 f LO- f RF f RF f LO f LO +f RF

Module 2 - 47
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Spectral Inversion

Example:
• RF signal programmed: 100MHz
• IF signal programmed: 1MHz
• fLO automatically programmed by the MWRECV: 100MHz + 1MHz = 101MHz
• Sum and Difference frequencies are created at fLO + fRF (201MHz) and fLO - fRF
(1MHz) where the 201MHz signal is NOT inverted but the 1MHz signal is inverted.
• The 1MHz signal is low-pass filtered and the signal is captured by the digitizer.
• Since the 1MHz signal is inverted in the frequency domain, you need to account
for it when computing the bin number(s) for the frequency(s) of interest.
Low-pass filter response

f0 f IF = f RF f LO f LO +f RF
f LO - f RF

Module 2 - 48
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

24
 Lab 2_3 LNA IP2
(2nd order intermodulation product)

LAB TIME

PN 553-405-78 MRP-Rev002

July 2005

Lab 2_3 LNA IP2

(2nd order intermodulation product)

LNA
TEST: LNA IP2
+15v
gnd
RF_LNA_inÆSource Pin RF_LNA_outÆReceivePin
DIB power supply
3.osp1 4.osp1

MWSource MWReceiver
RF_FrequencyÆ1000MHz
Input_powerÆ=(-25)
RF X IF
.AmplitudeExpectedÆ

Expected power=0
CenterFrequency=1000MHz
LO IFF_Freq=MWRXIF_Freq=12.5MHz

X
IFFilterÆMWRXfilter_freq=40MHz
LO RF
Fs=100MHz=MWRX_sample_freq
Set by RF_freqÆF2_freq N=16000=MWRX_sample_size
system =1000MHz
Capture name=F2_DSPWAVE_capture
IF Freq_offset=100K
Hz
12.5MHz

LAB TIME

Module 2 - 50
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

25
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3
Lab 2_3 Summary
¾ Lab 2.3
• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions, and Student Lab skeleton

path: \\xxx\LAB GUIDES\

Lab2_3 Instructions for LNA IP2.doc

• Summary: Write a program to measure the IP2 of the LNA on the class DIB.

ƒ Program the two fundamental CW input signals to 999.9MHz and 1000.0MHz at

-25dBm.
ƒ Set Fres of the MW receiver to a number evenly divisible into the frequency separation
between the carriers where: Fres= FS/N LNA

Estimated time: 30 minutes

DIB

MWSRC
MWRECV

MWSRC

Module 2 - 51
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ IP3 are the theoretical points where the power of the fundamental and the power in
the IMD product(s) would be equal at the device output, similar to IP2 described
previously but at different frequency points.

¾ With a 2-tone signal, f1 and f2, applied to the device input, the primary IP3 IMD
products appear at 2f1-f2 and 2f2-f1 on the device output.

¾ Once the IMD and fundamental signal power levels are known, the IP levels can be
calculated using Equation 1.
Pout

Pfund
3rd Order
IMD Psuppression

PIMD

2f1-f2 f1 f2 2f2-f1 Frequency

Module 2 - 52
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

26
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ Given a power input to the device of –30dBm for each tone and an output spectrum
that yields the following result, IP3 can be calculated as follows:

Pout
Equation 1:
Device Output (gain = +9dB)
Psuppression
IPN = + Pfund -21dBm Pfund
N −1
IMD Psuppression
= 50dBm
50dBm -71dBm Pimod
IP3 = − 21dBm = 4dBm
2
*Where order N=3 2f1-f2 f1 f2 2f2-f1 Frequency
NOTE: IP3 can be either input referred (IIP3) or output referred (OIP3).

The example illustrated above is OIP3 since the input power is not considered in the calculation.

Module 2 - 53
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3

¾ The IP3 IMD products increase at a rate of 3dB for each 1dB increase in fundamental
power.
¾ The actual IP3 point can never be reached in reality because the device goes into
compression.
¾ The IP3 point is generally about 10dB above the 1dB compression point.

IP3
Pout ≈10dB
P1dB
dB
Fundamental

3rd Order IMD

1:1 Product
3:1

Pin
dB

Module 2 - 54
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

27
 LAB 2_4 LNA IP3
(3nd order intermodulation product)

LAB TIME

PN 553-405-78 MRP-Rev002

July 2005

LAB 2_4 LNA IP3

(3nd order intermodulation product)

LNA
TEST: LNA IP3
+15v
gnd
RF_LNA_inÆSource Pin RF_LNA_outÆReceivePin
DIB power supply
3.osp1 4.osp1

MWSource MWReceiver
RF_FrequencyÆ1000MHz
Input_powerÆ=(-27)
RF X IF
.AmplitudeExpectedÆ

Expected power=0
.CenterFrequency=1000MHz
LO IFF_Freq=MWRXIF_freq=12.5MHz

X
IFFilterÆMWRXfilter_freq=40MHz
LO RF
Fs=100MHzÆMWRX_sample_freq
Set by RF_freqÆF2_freq N=16000ÆMWRX_sample_size
system =1000MHz
Capture name=IP3_DSPWave_capture
IF Freq_offset=100K
Hz
12.5MHz

LAB TIME

Module 2 - 56
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

28
 Module 2: IMD, IP2, IP3
Lab 2_4 Summary
¾ Lab 2.4
• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions, and Student Lab skeleton

path: \\xxx\LAB GUIDE

Lab2_4 Instructions for LNA IP3.doc

• Summary: Write a program to measure the output IP3 of the Class DIB LNA.

ƒ Program the two CW fundamentals to 1000MHz and 1000.1MHz at

-27dBm.
LNA
ƒ Set Fres of the MW receiver to an even number
divisible into the frequency separation
between the carriers where: Fres= FS/N. DIB

Estimated time: 30 minutes

MWSRC
MWRECV

MWSRC

Module 2 - 57
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3 (Continued)

• Intercept Point (IP3) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”
• Tester Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”

™ Noise Figure
• Noise Figure Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”
• Tester Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”

¾ Phase Noise
• Phase Noise Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”
• Tester Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”

¾ Module 2 Review

Module 2 - 58
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

29
 Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ Noise Figure Definition:

‰ Noise Figure (NF) is a measurement of the amount of noise that is
added by a device expressed in dB.

‰ Noise Figure is the logarithmic representation of the Noise Factor (F)

and is assigned the symbol NF, where:

NF = 10 × log10 (F )
NOISEin A NOISEout

NF = SNRin (dB ) − SNRout (dB ) When Source has thermal Noise of 290K !

( ) (
NF = PRFin (dBm ) − PNOISE in (dBm ) − PRFout (dBm ) − PNOISE out (dBm ) )
‰ Noise Factor is represented by the symbol F and is defined as:

⎛ PRFin ⎞
⎜⎜ P ⎟⎟ PNOISEout
= ⎝
SNRin NOISEin ⎠
F= =
SNRout ⎛ PRFout ⎞ G A PNOISEin
⎜⎜ ⎟
⎝ PNOISEout ⎟⎠

Module 2 - 59
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ Y-Factor Method to determine NF:

NOISE
‰The Y-Factor method is a technique used SOURCE
DUT RX
to measure the noise added by a device
that can be used to calculate the device’s
noise figure.
Thot N hot
ENR = −1 Y=
‰The Y-Factor technique uses a noise Tcold N cold
source that outputs a calibrated Excess
Noise Ratio (ENR). Where:
Tcold = 290o K (63.3o F = 16.5o C )
‰Two measurements are made: one with
the Noise Source turned “on” (to simulate ENR
a hot temperature condition) and one with F=
it turned “off” (cold condition). (Y − 1)
‰Knowing the Noise Source’s ratio of “on”

NFdB = ENRdB − 10 × log10 (Y − 1)

to “off” noise power, and knowing the
amount of noise measured at the output of
the device, the numbers can be input to a
formula to calculate the noise added by the
DUT (NFdB).

Module 2 - 60
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

30
 Module 2: Noise Figure
(FLEX Gen4 Microwave)
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports
¾ MW Port Module NS Path

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 2 - 61
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ Cascaded Noise Figure can be calculated using Friis’ equation

Given the following circuit: F = Noise Factor

G1 , F1 G 2 , F2 G3 , F3 G = Gain

input output

And given the following equation:

F2 − 1 F3 − 1
Frii’s Equation: Ftotal = F1 + +
G1 G1G2
‰ The total Noise Factor is minimally dependent on the gain of the final stage.
‰ The Noise Factor of the first stage is usually the most dominant.
‰ The Noise Factors of the subsequent stages do add to the total noise factor but are
diminished by the gains of the preceding stages.
‰ Often it is necessary to make adjustments to the Noise Figure calculations when the
system noise is significant and the DUT gain (first stage) is low.

Module 2 - 62
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

31
 Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ Cascaded Noise Figure Example

‰ Consider the following two RF system configurations:

F2 − 1 F3 − 1 F = Noise Factor
Ftotal = F1 + + NF = Noise Figure (dB)
G1 G1G2
Configuration 1:
G1 = −3dB G 2 = 16dB G3 = 12dB
NF1 = 3dB NF2 = 2dB NF3 = 7dB
input 3dB Pad Amp 1 Amp 2 output

Configuration 2:
G1 = 16dB G 2 = −3dB G3 = 12dB
NF1 = 2dB NF2 = 3dB NF3 = 7dB
input Amp 1 3dB Pad Amp 2 output

‰ Using Friis’ equation, calculate the total cascaded Noise Figure of each system…

Module 2 - 63
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ Cascaded Noise Figure Example

G1 = −3dB G2 = 16dB G3 = 12dB
Configuration 1:
NF1 = 3dB NF2 = 2dB NF3 = 7dB
input 3dB Pad Amp 1 Amp 2 output

⎛ 1.6 − 1 5 −1 ⎞
NF = 10 log10 (F ) = 10 log10 ⎜ 2 + + ⎟ = 5.31dB
⎝ 0.5 0.5 × 39.8 ⎠

Configuration 2: G1 = 16dB G 2 = −3dB G3 = 12dB

NF1 = 2dB NF2 = 3dB NF3 = 7dB
input Amp 1 3dB Pad Amp 2 output

⎛ 2 −1 5 −1 ⎞
NF = 10 log10 (F ) = 10 log10 ⎜1.6 + + ⎟ = 2.61dB
⎝ 39 .8 0 .5 × 39.8 ⎠
This is why the Low-Noise Amplifier appears on the receiver front end.

Module 2 - 64
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

32
 Module 2: Noise Figure

¾ Noise Source control VBT syntax:

‘connect the MW port noise source to the DUT pin

thehdw.MWNoiseSource(pin).Connect
•
'read back the system ENR value
ENR_dB = thehdw.MWNoiseSource(pin).ENR(RFFreq)
•
If hot Then ‘turn on the MW port noise source - HOT
thehdw.MWNoiseSource(pin).Enabled = tlMWNoiseSourceEnabledHot
Else ‘turn off the MW port noise source - COLD
thehdw.MWNoiseSource(pin).Enabled = tlMWNoiseSourceEnabledCold
End If
•
'read back the calibrated system NF
NF_dB = thehdw.MWReceiver(pin).NoiseFigure(RFFreq)
•
‘disconnect the MW port noise source from the DUT pin
thehdw.MWNoiseSource(pin).Disconnect

Note: Reference Lab solution for full example code

Module 2 - 65
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 2_5 LNA NF (noise figure)

LAB TIME

PN 553-405-78 MRP-Rev002

July 2005

33
 Lab 2_5 LNA NF (noise figure)

LNA
TEST: NF
+15v
gnd
RF_LNA_inÆSource Pin DIB power supply RF_LNA_outÆReceivePin
3.osp1 4.osp1

MWReceiver

X IFF_Freq=IF_Freq=5MHz

MWSource
Noise RF
IF Fs=25MHz=capture_rate
Source
N=25000=capture size

LO Capture name=cap cold

X
Capture name=cap hot
LO RF Cold power

Set by Hot power RF_freq=900MHz

system 900MHz Recv_NF
Receiver_gain_dB
IF ENR_val

5MHz RF_freq=900MHz

LAB TIME

Module 2 - 67
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Noise Figure

Lab 2_5 Summary
¾ Lab 2.5: Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure

LNA
LNAIn LNAOut

Coaxial cable Coaxial cable

DIB

• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions, and Student Lab skeleton

path: \\xxx\LAB GUIDE

Lab2_5 Instructions for LNA NF.doc

• Summary: Write a program to measure the noise figure of the LNA using the information
provided on previous slides
HINT: Gain Result is required to perform LNA Noise Figure measurement

Estimated time: 45 minutes

Module 2 - 68
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

34
 Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3 (Continued)

• Intercept Point (IP3) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”
• Tester Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”

¾ Noise Figure
• Noise Figure Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”
• Tester Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”

™ Phase Noise
• Phase Noise Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”
• Tester Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”

¾ Module 2 Review

Module 2 - 69
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ Phase Noise Definition:

• Phase noise is the single sideband noise resulting from the rapid, short-term,
random time-domain fluctuations in the phase of a signal.

• Phase noise is designated by the symbol L(f) relative to the signal power at a
given offset frequency in a 1-Hz bandwidth typically expressed in dBc/Hz.

Module 2 - 70
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

35
 Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ An ideal pure sinusoid in the frequency domain:

Signal Power
(dBm)
-40

-160

Frequency

¾ A typical sinusoid with phase noise sidebands:

Noise Power
(dBc/Hz)
-40

-160

Frequency

Module 2 - 71
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ A typical SSB phase noise plot:

SSB
Noise Power
(dBc/Hz)

-40

-160

Fc Offset Frequency

¾ Sources of phase noise:

• Leakage of the reference frequency in phase-locked loops.
• Incomplete suppression of undesired mixer components.
• Noise inherent in an oscillator or any signal source.
• Signal jitter and other phase/frequency deviations around and near the frequency of interest.

Module 2 - 72
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

36
 Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ Direct Spectrum Measurement Method:

– A spectrum analyzer can be used to measure a device’s output power spectrum, including its
phase noise. This method is limited by:
• The PN of the spectrum analyzer’s internal local oscillator.
• The dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer.
• The level of amplitude noise. (The spectrum analyzer normally does not distinguish
amplitude noise from PN. It measures the sum of both.)

¾ Phase Discrimination Measurement Method:

– The accuracy for measuring PN can be improved by choosing a test method that suppresses the
carrier and measures only the phase components at the device output.

Module 2 - 73
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ Signal to Noise (S/N) Measurement Method

Carrier

BW BW

LSB USB

offset offset

Module 2 - 74
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

37
 Module 2: Phase Noise

¾ Signal to Noise (S/N) Measurement Method VB Code

Public Function mw_SNR_DSB(ByVal capture As DSPWave, ByVal IFFreq As Double, _
ByVal Offset_Freq As Double, ByVal offset_bandwidth As Double, _
ByRef SNR As Double) As Long
' returns double-sideband average - signal to noise ratio in dBc/Hz
Dim spect As DSPWave, bin As Long, fres As Double, ampl As Double
Dim lsb_low As Long, usb_low As Long
Dim bincount As Long, bin_off As Long
Dim usb_magsq As DSPWave, lsb_magsq As DSPWave
Dim usb_power As Double, LSB_power As Double
Dim actual_bw As Double
fres = capture.FrequencyResolution
bin = IFFreq / fres
bin_off = Offset_Freq / fres
bincount = offset_bandwidth / fres
If bincount < 1 Then bincount = 1
actual_bw = bincount * fres
lsb_low = bin - bin_off - bincount / 2
usb_low = bin + bin_off - bincount / 2
Set spect = capture.Spectrum
ampl = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin)
Set usb_magsq = spect.Select(usb_low, 1, bincount).Copy ' spectrum has magnitude squared
Set lsb_magsq = spect.Select(lsb_low, 1, bincount).Copy
usb_power = usb_magsq.CalcSum
LSB_power = lsb_magsq.CalcSum
SNR = (-10# / Log(10#)) * Log(2# * actual_bw * ampl * ampl / (usb_power + LSB_power))
mw_SNR_DSB = 0 ' TL_SUCCESS
End Function

Module 2 - 75
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer

1 2 3 4 5

Each of the ports can be multiplexed

four ways providing access to eight Gain adjustment is performed on the signal, The digitizer samples the The digitized data is moved
independent instrument channels. 2 according to the value you program for phase noise signal at a fixed automatically to the onboard
1 Only one channel can be expected amplitude. The RF signal is sample rate of 100 MHz and processor for signal processing
connected at a time. downconverted to the IF signal then resamples to one of and analysis (including windowing
4
three sample rates and averaging, if programmed) by
determined by the value of routines specific to the Phase
the maximum offset Noise Analyzer. These routines
The measure module routes the IF
frequency. produce as measurement results
signal to a phase detector (FM 5
3 a set of calibrated phase noise
demodulator) that extracts the
baseband phase noise. spectral density values in dBc/Hz
at the requested offset
frequencies.

Module 2 - 76
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

38
 Module 2: Phase Noise

• Block Diagram of a generic phase discriminator

Delay - Line RFa

RF IN
Power
LP filter
Divider
Phase Shifter
( 90 degree ) RFb

• The LP filter produces a low frequency output, where the low frequency components are
proportional to the phase noise of the DUT’s carrier frequency.
• This holds true if the phase relationship between the RFa and the RFb inputs to the mixer
remain in quadrature.
• The Phase Shifter can provide variable control for maintaining the quadrature.
• The low frequency output signal is captured and analyzed to calculate the SSB PN normalized
in dBc/Hz at specified frequencies offset from the center frequency.

Module 2 - 77
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer

• Phase Noise Extraction

Delay - RFa
Line
Power FM freq. demodulation LP filter
Divider
Phase Shifter
( 90 degree ) RFb
Phase Detector
SSB Noise Power

Time Domain Freg. Domain NOISE

FREQ Domain
(dBc/Hz)

SPECTRAL DENSITY

-40
BB usb Rf usb

Offset freq. (band) Offset freq.( band) -160

FM freq. demodulation Offset Frequency

Fc

DSP

Module 2 - 78
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

39
 Module 2: Phase Noise

Delay - RFa
Line
Power To
IF LP filter
Divider Digitizer
Phase Shifter
( 90 degree ) RFb
Phase Detector

FLEX MW
Physical Debug
Display

Module 2 - 79
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer

Code Example using PNA VBT
' VBT to set up phase noise measurement for two
' offset frequencies
'
PNA routine
OVERVIEW
(see comments)
' RFFreq is carrier frequency in Hz
' dBm_expected is carrier power in dBm

' FreqRes is desired frequency resolution in Hz

' averages is number of spectral averages to be performed
'

' caplabel is an arbitrary string; it must match later

' trigger statement

'
' offset1, offset2 are frequency offsets in Hz

NOTE: To ensure accurate results, do not program any changes to MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer settings between the
trigger and readback of the measurement results.
Module 2 - 80
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

40
 Module 2: Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer
Code Example (cont.)

Public Function setup_PNA(ByVal pin As String, _

ByVal RFFreq As Double, dBm_expected As Double, _
ByVal FreqRes As Double, _ Set up PNA prototype
ByVal averages As Long, _ and variables declaration
ByVal caplabel As String, _
ByVal offset1 As Double, ByVal offset2 As Double) _
As Long
Dim offsets(0 To 1) As Double
offsets(0) = offset1
offsets(1) = offset2

Track largest
offset used

' keep track of largest requested offset to set MaxOffFrequency property

maxoff = offsets(0)
For off = 1 To 1
If offsets(off) > maxoff Then maxoff = offsets(off)
Next off

Set PNA
With thehdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer(pin) attributes 2
.AmplitudeExpected = dBm_expected
.CenterFrequency = RFFreq
.MaxOffsetFrequency = maxoff
.OffsetFrequencyList = offsets
.FrequencyResolution = FreqRes
.SpectralAverage = averages
.Waveforms.Add (caplabel)
End With
End Function

Module 2 - 81
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer

Code Example (cont.)
' VBT code to trigger Phase Noise Analyzer and retrieve
' DSP wave for background DSPProcedure processing Set up PNA trigger prototype
'
' DSPWaveName should be the name of a Procedure Variable of type DSPWave and variables declaration

Public Function PNA_trigger(ByVal pin As String,

ByVal caplabel As String, _
ByVal DSPWaveName As String, _
ByVal settle_msec As Double)
' connect and trigger the Phase Noise Analyzer
Connect and Wait for
Dim site As Long settling and TRIGGER 1

thehdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer(pin).Connect
2 Numbers
' wait statements for settling times as needed
reference
thehdw.Wait settle_msec / 1000# ' wait for DUT to settle previous
3
thehdw.SettleWait 0.01 ' wait for tester to settle PNA block
diagram
thehdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer(pin).Waveforms.Trigger (caplabel)
DSPWave holding result 4
' store DSPWave which will hold the measurement result stored in PDE variable in a
' in a procedure variable
site loop
site = TheExec.Sites.SelectedSite 5
thevars(DSPWaveName, site) = _
thehdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer(pin) _
.Waveforms(caplabel).DSPWave.pin(pin).Value(site)
' wait for capture to complete before disconnecting
' tester instrumentation
Wait for capture and
Dim finished As Boolean Disconnect
While Not finished
finished = thehdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer(pin).capture.IsCaptureDone
Wend
' disconnect Phase Noise Analyzer
thehdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer(pin).Disconnect
End Function Module 2 - 82
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

41
 Module 2: Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer
Code Example (cont.)

' DSP Procedure to read back PhaseNoiseAnalyzer measurement for two offsets
'
' Note: an alternative is to use capture.Element(0), capture.Element(1) DSP Procedure reads
' in a Limits test element back PNA measurement
for 2 offsets
Public Function extract_2_elements(ByVal capture As DSPWave, _
ByRef elt0 As Double, _
ByRef elt1 As Double) As Long

elt0 = capture.Element(0)
elt1 = capture.Element(1)
End Function

Module 2 - 83
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Microwave Phase Noise Analyzer

Methods
Connect
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.Connect
Disconnect Reference IG-XL HELP for details
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.Disconnect on each METHOD and PROPERTY
Reset
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.Reset

Properties
Amplitude Expected
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.AmplitudeExpected
Analysis Window
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.Window
Capture Status
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.Capture.IsCaptureDone
Center Frequency (Carrier) Expected
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.CenterFrequency
Connection Status
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.IsConnected
Frequency Resolution
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.ActualFrequencyResolution
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.FrequencyResolution
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.PreciseFrequencyResolution
Offset Frequencies
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.MaxOffsetFrequency
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.OffsetFrequencyList
Spectral Averaging
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.SpectralAverage
Waveforms
TheHdw.MWPhaseNoiseAnalyzer.Pins.Waveforms

Module 2 - 84
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

42
 LAB 2_6 PN (phase noise)

LAB TIME

PN 553-405-78 MRP-Rev002

July 2005

LAB 2_6 PN (phase noise)

LNA
TEST: LNA PN
+15v
gnd
RF_LNA_inÆSource Pin RF_LNA_outÆReceivePin
DIB power supply
3.osp1 4.osp1

MWSource

Phase Noise Analyzer

RF_FrequencyÆ2472MHz PNA
.Amplitude Expected=dBm_expected=5
Amplitude=5 .MaxOffsetFrequency=10000
Frq. List=1KHz,10KHz,100KHz,200KHz,300KHz
Captured waveform=PNACapture
.FrequencyResolution=FreqRes=100
.SpectralAverage=Averages=50
.CenterFrequencyÆRF_FrequencyÆ2472MHz

LAB TIME

Module 2 - 86
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

43
 Module 2: Phase Noise
Lab 2_6 Summary
¾ Lab 2.6:

Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions and Student Lab skeleton

path: \\xxx\LAB GUIDE

Lab2_6 Instructions for PN.doc

Module 2 - 87
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 2: Module Review

¾ IMD, IP2, IP3 (Continued)

• Intercept Point (IP3) Testing Methodology
• Simulator Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”
• Tester Lab 2.4: “Measure DUT (LNA) IP3”

¾ Noise Figure
• Noise Figure Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”
• Tester Lab 2.5: “Measure DUT (LNA) Noise Figure”

¾ Phase Noise
• Phase Noise Definition
• Simulator Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”
• Tester Lab 2.6: “Measure MWSource Phase Noise”

™ Module 2 Review

Module 2 - 88
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

44
 Module 2: Module Review

¾ Upon completion of this module the student should be able to:

9 Use the FLEX/microFLEX MW instruments to measure RF Gain, 1 dB

Compression, Intermodulation Products (IP2 and IP3), Noise Figure (NF), and
Phase Noise (PN).
9 Develop IG-XL code on the FLEX-microFLEX using procedure elements, VBT
code, interpose functions and DSP procedures to measure and test Gain, 1dB
Compression, IP, NF, and PN.
9 Debug the test programs using the WaveScope and FLEX-microFLEX debug tools
running on the host computer.
9 Run the test programs using the MW on-board G4 processor to get pass fail
results.

Module 2 - 89
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

45
M O D U L E 3

Module

3
Module 3 covers:

Analog Modulation
Quadrature Modulation
Modulated Source
Digital Modulation
 Module 3: Objectives

¾ On completion of this module the student should be able to:

• Understand the Modulation Instruments in the FLEX/microFLEX Tester

• Understand common Analog Modulation Schemes

• Understand and perform common Modulation Tests

(AM Modulation, I/Q Balance Test, I/Q Imbalance Test)

– Create common Modulated Waveforms

Module 3 - 1
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: FLEX RF Modulation System Overview

¾ Module Objectives

™ Analog Modulation
• Simulator Lab: AM (Amplitude Modulated) Modulation – using Baseband instruments
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC) – do this after the next
MWMS session.

¾ Quadrature Modulator/Demodulator DUT TEST

• Tester Lab 3.2a: Testing DUT Quadrature Modulator using MWReceiver and BBAC
source
• Capturing Baseband I and Q Signals using a Single BBAC digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.2b: Testing DUT Quadrature Demodulator using MWSOURCE and BBAC
digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.3a: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.3 using (VHFAC)
• Tester Lab 3.3b: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.4 using (VHFAC)

¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX RF MOD SOURCE and MWSRC and MWRECV System Overview
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC)

¾ Digital Modulation
– Tester Lab 3.4: GSM Signal Generation using VHFAC

Module 3 - 2
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

1
 Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Introduction to Modulation in Analog Communication System

Signal
Signal Source
Source Modulator
Modulator Transmitter
Transmitter

b(t) = baseband sRF(t) = modulated

signal signal

Recovered
Recovered Signal
Signal Filter
Filter Demodulator
Demodulator Receiver
Receiver

b(t) = demodulated r(t) = received signal

signal

Module 3 - 3
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Analog Communications: parameters of a sinusoid

s(t ) = A cos(ω c t + θ )
Continuous AM waveform equation
carrier Phase
Amplitude Frequency
s AM (t ) = Ac [1 + μ x(t ) ] cos ω IF t
Analog Modulation Types: = Ac [1 + μ Am cos ω mt ] cos ω IF t.
• Amplitude Modulation (AM)
• Frequency Modulation (FM)
Discrete AM waveform equation
• Phase Modulation (PM)
⎡ ⎛ i ⎞⎤ ⎛ i ⎞
s AM (t ) = Ac ⎢1 + μ Am cos 2π f m ⎜ ⎟ ⎥ cos 2π f IF ⎜ ⎟
¾ Amplitude Modulation ⎝ f s ⎠⎦ ⎝ fs ⎠
⎣
s(t ) = b(t ) cos(ω ct + θ )
Where
A baseband signal is used to fmod/fs=Mmod/N
modulate the carrier’s amplitude and
fIF/fs=MIF/N
Note: i is index
from 0 to N-1

Module 3 - 4
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

2
 Module 3: Analog Modulation
¾ Index of Modulation

To simplify the detection of the baseband signal, the modulated signal’s power level
is increased by sending an additional tone at the carrier frequency.

For this special case,

the general AM equation is: s AM (t ) = Ac [1 + μ b(t ) ] cos ω c t
carrier signal freq.

b(t ) = Am cos ω mt ,
If the baseband signal is a tone,

modulating signal freq.

s ( t ) = A c [1 + μ A c o s ω t ]c o s ω t
then, the AM equation becomes: A M m m c

The Index of Modulation µ describes the portion of the baseband

power in the modulated signal

Module 3 - 5
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Amplitude Modulation DSS-

DSS-SC (Double Sideband Suppressed Carrier)

Fourier Transform

baseband
signal baseband
time freq

Modulation
Carrier, fc
envelope, fm

Lower Upper
Fourier Transform Sideband Sideband

modulated
time signal baseband
fc freq
Module 3 - 6
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

3
 Module 3: Analog Modulation
¾ Time Multiplication ÅÆ Frequency Translation

b(t ) = cos(2π ⋅ 64kHz ⋅ t )

Time

Time

Frequency

Baseband
s AM (t ) = 1 cos(2π ⋅ 1.984MHz ⋅ t )
Signal b(t) Baseband 2
Signal sAM(t) + 1 cos(2π ⋅ 2.112MHz ⋅ t )
2
sc (t ) = cos(2π ⋅ 2.048MHz ⋅ t )
Frequency

Time

Frequency

LO
Module 3 - 7
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ AM-
AM-Modulation Envelope
Envelope contains the
• Envelope of the modulated modulating signal information
wave contains baseband
Time
waveform

• No information is in the
carrier tone - it is only used
for additional power

Frequency
Carrier cos ωct

Baseband Signal b(t) Module 3 - 8

PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

4
 Module 3: Analog Modulation
¾ Index of Modulation

Frequency
zero percent modulation:
μ=0

100 percent modulation:

μ=1

Frequency

Module 3 - 9
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ AM-
AM-Modulation: Power in Carrier
Envelope contains the
sAM (t ) = A[1+ μ b(t )] cosωct modulating signal information

μ = 0.5
fm = 65 kHz
Tm = 15.6 μs

BW = 2 fm
• Envelope of wave contains
baseband waveform
• No information is in the Frequency
carrier tone; it is only used Carrier cos ωct
for additional power

Baseband Signal b(t) Module 3 - 10

PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

5
 Module 3: Analog Modulation
¾ Phase Inversion when μ >1

Cannot use an envelope detector for

detection in this case

180 degree phase reversals

Module 3 - 11
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: AW Waveform Creation – Coherency Verification

• Coherency equation:
fi = frequency of interest
f s finterest
= f s = sampling frequency
N M N = size of waveform array
M = cycles = frequency bin
• fm coherency verification:

⎛N⎞ ⎛ 4096 ⎞
M m= f m ⎜ ⎟ = 64kHz ⎜ ⎟=4
⎝ fs ⎠ ⎝ 65.536 MHz ⎠

• fIF coherency verification:

⎛N⎞ ⎛ 4096 ⎞
M = f IF ⎜ ⎟ = 2.048MHz ⎜ ⎟ = 128
IF
⎝ s⎠
f ⎝ 65.536 MHz ⎠
• M must be an integer.
Module 3 - 12
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

6
 Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: AM Waveform Creation – Coherency Verification

Using VBT code, a Cosine is created using the following function:

Call X.CreateCos(PhaseIncrementPerSample, InitialPhase, SampleSize)

'Takes an existing DspWave and replaces its contents with a vector containing
'a sampled cosine wave of the specified phase increment per sample (in radians),
'the initial phase (also in radians), and the sample size.

'Algorithm

For i = 0 To SampleSize - 1
X.Element(i) = Cos(PhaseIncrementPerSample * i + InitialPhase)
Next

Module 3 - 13
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation Lab 3.1 Simulator

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: AM Waveform Creation – VBT Code Example

Baseband_Signal.CreateCos
Baseband_Signal.CreateCos 22 ** Pi
Pi // N,
N, 0,
0, 4096
4096

Baseband_Signal.SampleRate
Baseband_Signal.SampleRate == Fs
Fs
Baseband_Signal.Plot
Baseband_Signal.Plot "Baseband_Signal"
"Baseband_Signal"

Baseband_Signal
1

0.5

-0.5

-1
0 10u 20u 30u 40u 50u 60u
Time(seconds)

Module 3 - 14
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

7
 Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: AM Waveform Creation – LO Signal VBT Code

' now create the sine wave that defines the LO - NOTE LO is carrier is our example

LO_Signal.CreateCos ((2 * Pi) / (N / 32)), 0, 4096

LO_Signal.SampleRate = Fs
LO_Signal.Plot "LO_Signal"

LO_Signal

1.5

0.5

-0.5

-1

-1.5

0 10u 20u 30u 40u 50u 60u 70u

Time(seconds)

Module 3 - 15
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: Complete AM-
AM-Modulation Waveform
‘Multiply
‘Multiplythe
thetwo
twosine
sinewaves
wavestogether:
together:A[cos(carrier_freq)
A[cos(carrier_freq)+(cos(carrier_freq)*cos(baseband_freq)*mod_index]
+(cos(carrier_freq)*cos(baseband_freq)*mod_index]

Set
Setmodulation_signal
modulation_signal==Baseband_Signal.MultiplyScalar(Mod_Percentage)
Baseband_Signal.MultiplyScalar(Mod_Percentage)
Set
Setmodulation_signal
modulation_signal==LO_Signal.Multiply(modulation_signal)
LO_Signal.Multiply(modulation_signal)
Set
Setmodulation_signal
modulation_signal==modulation_signal.Add(LO_Signal)
modulation_signal.Add(LO_Signal)
Set
Setmodulation_signal
modulation_signal==modulation_signal.MultiplyScalar(0.499999)
modulation_signal.MultiplyScalar(0.499999)
modulation_signal.SampleRate
modulation_signal.SampleRate==Fs Fs
modulation_signal.Plot
modulation_signal.Plot"modulation_signal"
"modulation_signal"
modulation_signal
0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

-0.2

-0.4

-0.6

-0.8
0 10u 20u 30u 40u 50u 60u 70u
Time(seconds)

Module 3 - 16
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

8
 Module 3: Analog Modulation
¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: AM-
AM-Modulation Waveform-
Waveform- Time Domain capture

Module 3 - 17
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: AM Spectral Analysis

Modulation index:

The spectrum of the AM signal

has three tones:
- the carrier
- the lower sideband
- the upper sideband

Freq domain Time domain

⎛V +V ⎞ μ=(Vmax-Vmin)/(Vmax+Vmin)
volts μ = ⎜ LSB USB ⎟
⎝ Am ⋅ VCarrier ⎠

Ac

1 μ Ac Am
2

fc − fm fc fc + fm freq
Module 3 - 18
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

9
 Module 3: Analog Modulation

¾ Simulator Lab 3.1: DSP Procedure

AM time domain
waveform

Pseudo code

Public Function mw_power(ByVal capture As DSPWave, ByVal IFFreq As Double,

ByVal recv_gain As Double, _ByRef power_dBm As Double) As Long

Dim spect As DSPWave, bin As Long, fres As Double, ampl As Double

fres = capture.FrequencyResolution
bin = IFFreq / fres The complex
spectrum (FFT)
Set spect = capture.Spectrum
ampl = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin)

power_dBm = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * ampl * ampl / (2 * 50)) - recv_gain

Magnitude values at
specific frequencies
Module 3 - 19
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: AM SB power

Public Function am_sb_power(ByVal capture As DSPWave, ByVal IFFreq As Double, ByVal recv_gain As Double,
_
ByRef power_dBm_hi As Double, ByRef power_dBm_lo As Double) As Long
Dim spect As DSPWave, bin_hi As Long, bin_lo As Long, fres As Double, ampl_hi As Double, ampl_lo As
Double
fres = capture.FrequencyResolution
bin_hi = (IFFreq / fres) + separation
bin_lo = (IFFreq / fres) - separation
Set spect = capture.Spectrum
ampl_hi = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin_hi)
ampl_lo = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(bin_lo)
power_dBm_hi = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * ampl_hi * ampl_hi / (2 * 50)) - recv_gain
power_dBm_lo = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * ampl_lo * ampl_lo / (2 * 50)) - recv_gain
Pseudo-
code

Module 3 - 20
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

10
 Module 3: FLEX RF Modulation System Overview

¾ Module Objectives

¾ Analog Modulation
• Simulator Lab: AM (Amplitude Modulated) Modulation – using Baseband instruments
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC) – do this after the next
MWMS session.
™ Quadrature Modulator/Demodulator DUT TEST
• Tester Lab 3.2a: Testing DUT Quadrature Modulator using MWReceiver and BBAC
source
• Capturing Baseband I and Q Signals using a Single BBAC digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.2b: Testing DUT Quadrature Demodulator using MWSOURCE and BBAC
digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.3a: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.3 using (VHFAC)
• Tester Lab 3.3b: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.4 using (VHFAC)

¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX RF MOD SOURCE and MWSRC and MWRECV System Overview
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC)
¾ Digital Modulation
– Tester Lab 3.4: GSM Signal Generation using VHFAC

Module 3 - 21
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

•Quadrature Modulation Quadrature Modulation

1.200 1.200

0.800
A = Magnitude Q = Quadrature
0.800
I I ⋅ cosωLOt
0.400
0.400

+
-1.200 -0.800 -0.400
0.000
0.000

θ = Phase
0.400 0.800 1.200 0.000
cosωLOt
∑ sRF (t) = I cosωLOt −QsinωLOt
-1.200 -0.800 -0.400 0.000 0.400 0.800 1.200

I = In-Phase
-0.400

°
-0.400

-0.800
90 −
-0.800

-1.200 Q
Polar Format Cartesian Format
-1.200

Q⋅sinωLOt

A= I +Q 2 2
I = Acosθ
Q
θ = arctan Q = Asinθ
I
sRF (t ) = cos ω RF t
LPF I (t ) = 1 cos ω IF t
2
1.200
cos ω LO t
0.800
90 °

LPF
0.400

Q(t ) = 1 cos(ω IF t + 90° )

Constellation Diagram -1.200 -0.800 -0.400
0.000
0.000 0.400 0.800 1.200
2
-0.400

Quadrature Demodulation
-0.800

-1.200

Module 3 - 22
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

11
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ IQ Hardware Diagram

I = cos ω IF t
BBAC

sRF (t ) = cos(ω LO − ω IF )t
I
cos ω LO t Modulator
MWSRC LO RF MWRECV
Q

Q = − sin ω IF t
BBAC

Module 3 - 23
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation

¾ Demodulator Hardware Resources

I (t ) = cos ω IF t
cos ω LO t BBACDIG
MWSRC
I
Demodulator
LO RF

Q
MWSRC BBACDIG
cos ω RF t
Q (t ) = cos(ω IF t + 90 ) °

Module 3 - 24
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

12
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ Quadrature Modulation Representation

Standard form of modulated signal:

S RF (t ) = Ab cos(ω RF t + θ b )

Quadrature form of modulated signal:

S RF (t ) = Ib (t ) cos ω RF t − Qb (t ) sin ω RF t

Where:
• Ab and θb is the amplitude and phase of the baseband
(modulating) signal

• Ib and Qb are the in-phase and quadrature

components of the baseband signal

Module 3 - 25
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Quadrature Modulator

• The I and Q baseband levels modulate the carrier’s amplitude and phase.
• Frequency modulation is accomplished using the phase component.
• Used to generate many types of modulated waveforms.
• It is relatively simple to implement in hardware.

I I ⋅ cos ω LO t

+
cos ω LO t
∑ sRF (t ) = I cos ω LO t − Q sin ω LO t
90° −

Q ⋅ sin ω LO t

Module 3 - 26
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

13
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ Math Behind Quadrature Modulator Test

If the modulator I and Q signals are:

I = cos ω IF t and Q = − sin ω IF t

Then, the modulator’s RF output will be:

sRF ( t ) = cos ω LO t ⋅ cos ω IF t + sin ω LO t ⋅ sin ω IF t
= 1 2 cos (ω LO − ω IF ) t + 1 2 cos (ω LO + ω IF ) t
+ 1 2 cos (ω LO − ω IF ) t − 1 2 cos (ω LO + ω IF ) t
= cos (ω LO − ω IF ) t.
0

I = cos ω IF t I ⋅ cos ω LO t

cos(ω LO t )
+
sRF (t ) = I cos ω LO t − Q sin ω LO t
∑ = cos(ω LO − ω IF ) t
90° −

Q = − sin ω IF t Q ⋅ sin ω LO t
Module 3 - 27
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ QM Modulator Example 1: I=1, Q=0

I =1 I ⋅ cos ω LO t

cos ω LO t sRF (t ) = cos(ω LO t )

°
∑
90
−

Q=0 Q ⋅ sin ω LO t

Module 3 - 28
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

14
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ QM Modulator Example 2: I=1, Q=1

I =1 I ⋅ cos ω LO t

cos ω LO t sRF (t ) = 2 cos (ω LO t + 45° )

+

∑
90°
−

Q =1 Q ⋅ sin ω LO t

Module 3 - 29
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ QM Modulator Example 3: I= coswt, Q=0

I = cos ω IF t I ⋅ cos ω LO t

cos ω LO t sRF (t ) = cos ω IF t cos ω LO t

+

∑
90°
−

Q=0 Q ⋅ sin ω LO t

Module 3 - 30
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

15
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ QM Modulator Suppression Test
I = cos ω IF t I ⋅ cos ω LO t

cos ω LO t sRF (t ) = cos(ω LO − ω IF )t

+

∑
90°
−

Q = − sin ω IF t − Q ⋅ sin ω LO t

Module 3 - 31
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ QM Modulator Suppression Test

• Sources a cosine tone to the I port and a negative sine tone to the Q port.

• Ideally, the RF output is a single sideband tone that is in-phase with the carrier tone.

• The RF output of a non-ideal quadrature modulator has power at the LO and second
sideband frequencies.

• The suppression test quantifies how well the LO power and the second sideband powers
are suppressed.

dBm

Suppression
(dBc)

f LSB f ca rrier fU SB frequency

Module 3 - 32
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

16
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ QM Modulator Test Calculations

Suppression Tests:

USB Suppression dBc = LSB PowerdBm − USB PowerdBm

Carrier Suppression dBc = LSB PowerdBm − Carrier PowerdBm

dBm

Suppression
(dBc)

f LSB f ca rrier fU SB frequency

Module 3 - 33
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Modulator IQ suppression

Public Function modulator_iq_balance(ByVal capture As DSPWave, ByVal Carrier_IFFreq As Double, _

ByVal IQ_freq As Double, ByVal recv_gain As Double, _
ByRef LSB_power As Double, _
ByRef carrier_supp As Double, _
ByRef USB_supp As Double, _
ByRef usb_power As Double, _
ByRef carrier_power As Double) As Long

Dim spect As DSPWave, carrier_bin As Long, fres As Double

Dim lsb_ampl As Double, usb_ampl As Double, carrier_ampl As Double
Dim lsb_bin As Long, usb_bin As Long, separation As Long

fres = capture.FrequencyResolution
carrier_bin = Carrier_IFFreq / fres
separation = IQ_freq / fres
lsb_bin = carrier_bin - separation
usb_bin = carrier_bin + separation

Set spect = capture.Spectrum

lsb_ampl = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(lsb_bin)
carrier_ampl = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(carrier_bin)
usb_ampl = spect.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(usb_bin)

LSB_power = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * lsb_ampl * lsb_ampl _

/ (2 * 50)) - recv_gain
usb_power = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * usb_ampl * usb_ampl _
/ (2 * 50)) - recv_gain
carrier_power = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * carrier_ampl * carrier_ampl _
/ (2 * 50)) - recv_gain

carrier_supp = (-20# / Log(10#)) * Log(carrier_ampl / lsb_ampl)

USB_supp = (-20# / Log(10#)) * Log(lsb_ampl / usb_ampl)

Module 3 - 34
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

17
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Sourcing BBAC Segments

1. Determine the BBAC sampling frequency and segment size

2. Create the I Q Signals

3. Set up and connect the BBAC

4. Start Segment using Pattern

Module 3 - 35
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Programming the BBAC Instrument

Create the Segment in VBT and Program the BBACsrc (67 kHz sinewave)

Dim M As Long
Dim IQ_freq As Double
IQ_freq = 68000#
M = (IQ_freq * 8192) / 512000#

With thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(Ichanpin)
.Signals.Add (modulationwave)
.Signals.DefaultSignal = modulationwave
With .Signals(modulationwave)
.SampleRate = 512000#
.SampleSize = 8192
.Amplitude = bbacamplitude
.VoltageRange = bbacamplitude
.WaveDefinitionName = "Sine_67KHz"
.CycleCount = M
.LoadSamples
.LoadSettings
End With
.Connect tlBBACSourceFromPOS + tlBBACSourceFromNEG
.Connect tlBBACSourceFromREF, tlBBACSourceToCCC
End With

Module 3 - 36
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

18
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Programming the BBAC Instrument (cont’

(cont’d)

With thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(Qchanpin)
.Signals.Add (modulationwave)
.Signals.DefaultSignal = modulationwave
With .Signals(modulationwave)
.SampleRate = 512000
.SampleSize = 8192
.Amplitude = bbacamplitude
.VoltageRange = bbacamplitude
.Phase = bbacphase
.WaveDefinitionName = "Sine_67KHz"
.CycleCount = M
.LoadSamples
.LoadSettings
End With
.Connect tlBBACSourceFromPOS + tlBBACSourceFromNEG
.Connect tlBBACSourceFromREF, tlBBACSourceToCCC
End With

¾ Start Segment using Pattern:

Pattern:

thehdw.Digital.Patterns.Pat(patternname).Run ""

Module 3 - 37
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Source I and Q Waveforms using 2 BBACs

Start both BBAC segments

thehdw.Digital.Patterns.Pat(patternname).Run ""
thehdw.SettleWait (0.001)

Remember to
insert vector with

repeat microcode
after Resync vector
to account for
pipeline

Module 3 - 38
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

19
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation

¾ Capturing Baseband Modulated Signals

• Device having analog baseband or IF outputs are captured using a digitizer (BBACDIG)

DUT

DIB
RF
BBACDIG
LO

Module 3 - 39
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab Session 3.2a

I/Q Modulation Using the BBAC
Modulator DUT Test

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-79 MRP-Rev 002

20
 Lab 3.2a IQmod_bb Using BBAC

• Instrument setup

I = cos ω IF t

BBAC

sRF (t ) = cos(ω LO − ω IF )t

I
cos ω LOt Modulator
MWSRC LO RF MWRECV

Q = − sin ω IF t
BBAC

LAB TIME

Module 3 - 41
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 3.2a I/Qmod_bb

I/Qmod_bb Using BBAC
mod_in
INPUT(BBAC):
Thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(Ichanpin)=
I_mod_in_hiÆSourceS1ÆBBACSrcPosÆ2.srcpos1
Signal Name: modulationwave
Fs=512000Hz
N=8192=SampleSize
.amplitude=bbacamplitude=.173
INPUT: From MWSOURCE .WaveDefinitionName=“Cosine_67KHz” OUTPUT to (MWReceiver):
LO(3.osp3)RF_LO IQ_freq=68KHz RF_MOD OUT (4.osp3) MWReceiver
I
LO_Mod_inÆ3.a3Æsource is TCM .Capture.SampleRate=16384000
thehdwMWSource.Pins(SourcePin) .Capture.SampleSize.value=8192
.Frequency=Sourcefrequency=.89GHz LO RF_out Waveform name=“modulation_capture”
.Amplitude=sourcepower= MODULATOR IF_freq=.IFFrequency=IFFreq=5MHz
Rf_ input_power=10 DUT .IFFilter=40000000
Amp_expected= 0dB

Q .CenterFrequency=sourcefrequency=Carrier_FFreq=2GHz

INPUT(BBAC):
Thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(Qchanpin)
Q_mod_in_hiÆSourceS2ÆBBACSrcPosÆ2.srcpos2
Signal Name: modulationwave
Fs=512000Hz
N=8192=SampleSize
.amplitude=bbacamplitude=.173
WaveDefinitionName=“Sine_67KHz”
Phase=0
IQ_freq=68KHz

*BB I-Q NOT using MWMS, uses BBAC, LO uses MWSOURCE, RF output sent to MWRECEIVER LAB TIME

Module 3 - 42
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

21
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation Lab 3.2
¾ IQ Modulator
Conversion Carrier Sideband
Frequency Loss Rejection Rejection Harmonic Suppression
(MHz) (dB) (-dBc) (-dBc) (-dBc)
Model RF/LO I&Q 3xI/Q 5xI/Q
Number fL fU Min. Max. Mean Max. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min.
ZAMIQ-895M 868 895 DC 5 8 10.5 40 30 40 30 52 35 58 50

Absolute maximum power, voltage and current

rating:
LO power max = 50mW
I&Q current, 40mA
Operating LO power: 10 ± 1dBm
1dB compression: 0dBm typical
Conversion Loss = (I+Q) power, dBm - RF power,
dBm
Carrier and sideband rejections measured at -
5dBm I/Q power.

Module 3 - 43
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab Session 3.3a

I/Q Modulation Using the VHFAC
Modulator Test

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-79 MRP-Rev 002

22
 Lab 3.3a IQmod_bb Using VHFAC

• Instrument setup

I = cos ω IF t

VHFAC

sRF (t ) = cos(ω LO − ω IF )t

I
cos ω LOt Modulator
MWSRC LO RF MWRECV
Q

Q = − sin ω IF t
VHFAC

LAB TIME

Module 3 - 45
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 3.3a IQmod_bb Using VHFAC

mod_in
INPUT(VHFAC):
Thehdw.VHFACSource.Pins(Ichanpin)=
I_mod_in_hiÆVHFACSrc0Æ22.a3
Signal Name: modulationwave
Fs=vhfac_fsam=10,000,000Hz
N=1000=SampleSize
.amplitude=vhfacamplitude=.173
.WaveDefinitionName=“cosine_67KHz”
IQ_freq=100KHz
I
INPUT: From MWSOURCE OUTPUT to (MWReceiver):
LO(3.osp3)RF_LO RF_MOD OUT (4.osp3) MWReceiver
LO_Mod_inÆ3.a3Æsource is TCM .Capture.SampleRate=100MHz
thehdwMWSource.Pins(SourcePin) LO RF_out .Capture.SampleSize=10000
MODULATOR
.Frequency=Sourcefrequency=.89GHz DUT Waveform name=“modulation_capture”
.Amplitude=sourcepower=Rf_ input_power=10 IF_freq=.IFFrequency=IFFreq=5MHz
.IFFilter=10MHz
Q
Amp_expected= 0dB
.CenterFrequency=sourcefrequency=Carrier_FFreq=2GHz
INPUT(VHFAC):
Thehdw.VHFACSource.Pins(Qchanpin)
Q_mod_in_hiÆVHFACSrc1Æ22.b2
Signal Name: modulationwave
Fs=vhfac_fsam=10,000,000Hz
N=1000=SampleSize
.amplitude=vhfacamplitude=.173
WaveDefinitionName=“Sine_67KHz”
Phase=90
IQ_freq=100KHz
*BB I-Q NOT using MWMS, uses VHFAC, LO uses MWSOURCE, RF output sent to MWRECEIVER
LAB TIME

Module 3 - 46
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

23
 Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation

¾ Demodulator Hardware Resources

I (t ) = cos ω IF t
cos ω LO t BBACDIG
MWSRC
I
Demodulator
LO RF

Q
MWSRC BBACDIG
cos ω RF t
Q(t ) = cos(ω IF t + 90 ) °

Module 3 - 47
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation

¾ Quadrature Demodulator

• The RF signal is demodulated into I and Q components

• From the I and Q signals, the amplitude, phase, and frequency
can be determined
• It is relatively simple to implement in hardware

I (t)
LPF

sRF (t )
cosωLOt
90°
Q(t)
LPF

Module 3 - 48
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

24
 Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation
¾ Quadrature Demodulator Balance Test
sRF (t ) = cos ω RF t
cos ω IF t
cos ω RF t

I
LPF

cos ω LO t
90 °
Q
LPF

cos(ω IF t + 90° )

Module 3 - 49
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation

¾ Quadrature Demodulator Balance Test

A cosine tone is sourced to the RF port.

Ideally, the baseband output I and Q signals will have the same
amplitude but differ in phase by 90 degrees.

The gain imbalance test is a measure of the magnitude

difference between the I and Q signals.

The phase imbalance test is a measure of the phase difference

between the I and Q signals.

By taking an FFT of each the captured I and Q signals, the

magnitude and phase are tested.

Module 3 - 50
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

25
 Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation
¾ Math Behind Quadrature Demodulator Test
If the demodulator input signal is:
sRF (t ) = cos(ω RF t )

then, the demodulator’s I and Q output will be:

I demod = cos ω RF t ⋅ cos ω LO t Qdemod = cos ω RF t ⋅ (− sin ω LO t )
= 1 2 cos (ω RF − ω LO ) t + 1 2 cos (ω RF + ω LO ) = −1 2sin (ω RF − ω LO ) t − 1 2 cos (ω RF + ω LO )

= 1 2 cos (ω RF − ω LO ) t = −1 2sin (ω RF − ω LO ) t
= −1 2sin ω IF t
= 1 2 cos ω IF t
= 1 2 cos(ω IF t + 90o ).

sRF (t ) = cos ωRF t

LPF I (t ) = 1 cos ωIF t
2
cos ωLOt
90°

LPF Q(t ) = 1 cos(ωIF t + 90° )

2
Module 3 - 51
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation

¾ Quadrature Demodulator Test Calculations

Balance tests:

Gain ImbalancedB = I Output PowerdBm − Q Output PowerdBm

Phase Imbalancedegrees = I Output Phasedegrees − Q Output Phasedegrees

V Vmag or rad

1V
3 convert to
V polar
2 1
V
2
real imag mag phase
1.05 rad
frequency Note: Reference previous slide frequency
for test definition.
f IF f IF
Module 3 - 52
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

26
 Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation
¾ Demodulator IQ balance

Public Function demodulator_iq_balance(ByVal capture_I As DSPWave, ByVal capture_Q As DSPWave, _

ByVal IQ_freq As Double, ByVal recv_gain As Double, _
ByRef carrier_power_I As Double, carrier_power_Q As Double) As Long

Dim spect_I As DSPWave, spect_Q As DSPWave, carrier_bin As Long, fres As Double

Dim carrier_ampl_I As Double, carrier_ampl_Q As Double
Vmag or rad

fres = capture_I.FrequencyResolution
carrier_bin = IQ_freq / fres

Set spect_I = capture_I.Spectrum

Set spect_Q = capture_Q.Spectrum mag phase
carrier_ampl_I = spect_I.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(carrier_bin)

carrier_power_I = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * carrier_ampl_I * carrier_ampl_I _ frequency

/ (2 * 50)) - recv_gain

carrier_ampl_Q = spect_Q.CalcAmplitudeFromSpectrum(carrier_bin) f IF
carrier_power_Q = (10# / Log(10#)) * Log(1000# * carrier_ampl_Q * carrier_ampl_Q _
/ (2 * 50)) - recv_gain

Module 3 - 53
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation

¾ Spectral Content of I and Q captured using single BBACDIG

FFT of captured I waveform Untitled

• Coherency relation:
-10dB

-15dB

-20dB

-25dB

-30dB

-35dB

-40dB

-45dB

-50dB

-55dB

-60dB

-65dB

-70dB

Bin number
-75dB

-80dB

IF frequency -85dB

-90dB

-95dB

-100dB

-105dB

-110dB

Ft M -115dB

=
-120dB

-125dB

-130dB

-135dB
0 20k 40k 60k 80k 100k 120k 140k 160k 180k 200k 220k 240k 260k
Frequency(Hertz)

Fs N
FFT of captured Q waveform
Untitled

BBACDIG
-10dB

-15dB

Capture size
-20dB

-25dB

sampling frequency
-30dB

-35dB

-40dB

-45dB

-50dB

-55dB

-60dB

-65dB

-70dB

-75dB

-80dB

-85dB

-90dB

-95dB

-100dB

-105dB

-110dB

-115dB

-120dB

-125dB

-130dB

-135dB
0 20k 40k 60k 80k 100k 120k 140k 160k 180k 200k 220k 240k 260k
Frequency(Hertz)

Module 3 - 54
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

27
 Lab Session 3.2b
I/Q Demodulation Using the BBAC
Demodulator DUT Test

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-79 MRP-Rev 002

LAB 3.2b IQdemod_bb Using BBAC

• Instrument Setup

I (t ) = cos ω IF t

cos ω LO t BBACDIG
MWSRC
I
Demodulator
LO RF

Q
MWSRC BBACDIG
cos ω RF t
Q(t ) = cos(ω IF t + 90° )

LAB TIME

Module 3 - 56
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

28
 LAB 3.2b IQdemod_bb Using BBAC
OUTPUT to (BBAC Dig):
thehdw.BBAC.Capture.Pins(I_CapturePin)
=I_mod_out_hiÆBBACCapPosÆCapture C2Æ2.cappos2
Signal Name: “I_demod_capture”
Fs=.SampleRate=512000
N=.SampleSize=1024
RECV_IF=5MHz
INPUT: From MWSOURCE INPUT From MWSOURCE:
IQ_Freq=67KHz I
LO_Demod_in(3.osp5)RF_LO Æsourced from TCM RF_Demod_in (4.osp4) MWSource
Thehdw.MWSource.Pins(LO_pin) thehdw.MWSource.Pins(SourcePin)
.Frequency=modulation _frequency=1000MHz .Frequency=modulation_IQ_frequency+modulation_frequency=67KHz+1000MHz

Input power= .Amplitude=modulation_power=10 DEMODULATOR .Amplitude=modulation_power=10

LO DUT RF_in

OUTPUT to (BBAC Dig):

thehdw.BBAC.Capture.Pins(Q_CapturePin)
=Q_mod_out_hiÆBBACCapPosÆCapture C1Æ2.cappos1
Signal Name: “Q_demod_capture”
Fs=.SampleRate=512000
N=.SampleSize=1024
RECV_IF=5MHz
IQ_Freq=67KHz

LAB TIME

*BB I-Q NOT using MWMS, uses BBAC, LO uses MWSOURCE, RF output sent to MWRECEIVER

Module 3 - 57
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Quadrature Demodulation Lab 3.3

¾ IQ Demodulator
Conversion Amplitude Phase Harmonic
Frequency Loss Unbalance Unbalance Suppression
(MHz) (dB) (dB) (Degrees) (-dBc)
Model RF/LO I&Q 3xI/Q 5xI/Q
Number fL fU Min. Max. Mean Max. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min.
ZAMIQ-895D 868 895 DC 5 8 10.5 0.15 0.3 1.5 4 52 35 58 50

Absolute maximum power, voltage and current

rating:
LO power max = 50mW
I&Q current, 40mA
Operating LO power: 10 ± 0.5dBm
1dB compression: +4dBm RF Input
Conversion Loss = (I+Q) power, dBm - RF power,
dBm
DC offset 1mV typical

Module 3 - 58
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

29
 Lab Session 3.3b
I/Q Demodulation Using the VHFAC
Demodulator Test

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-79 MRP-Rev 002

LAB 3.3b IQdemod_bb Using VHFAC

• Instrument Setup

I (t ) = cos ω IF t

cos ω LO t VHFACDIG
MWSRC
I
Demodulator
LO RF

Q
MWSRC VHFACDIG
cos ω RF t
Q(t ) = cos(ω IF t + 90° )

LAB TIME

Module 3 - 60
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

30
 LAB 3.3b IQdemod_bb Using VHFAC
OUTPUT to (VHFAC Dig):
thehdw.VHFAC.Capture.Pins(I_CapturePin)
=I_mod_out_hiÆVHFAC Cap0Æ22.a11
Signal Name: “I_demod_capture”
Fs=.SampleRate=512000
N=.SampleSize=1024
RECV_IF=5MHz
INPUT: From MWSOURCE INPUT From MWSOURCE:
IQ_Freq=67KHz
LO_Demod_in(3.osp5)RF_LO Æsourced from TCM I RF_Demod_in (4.osp4) MWSource
Thehdw.MWSource.Pins(LO_pin) thehdw.MWSource.Pins(SourcePin)
.Frequency=modulation _frequency=1000MHz .Frequency=modulation_IQ_frequency+modulation_frequency=67KHz+1000MHz

Input power= .Amplitude=modulation_power=10 .Amplitude=modulation_power=10

DEMODULATOR

LO DUT RF_in

OUTPUT to (VHFAC Dig):

thehdw.VHFAC.Capture.Pins(Q_CapturePin)
=Q_mod_out_hiÆVHFACCap1Æ22.b10
Signal Name: “Q_demod_capture”
Fs=.SampleRate=512000
N=.SampleSize=1024
RECV_IF=5MHz
IQ_Freq=67KHz

*BB I-Q NOT using MWMS, uses VHFAC, LO uses MWSOURCE, RF output sent to MWRECEIVER LAB TIME

Module 3 - 61
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: FLEX RF Modulation System Overview

¾ Module Objectives

¾ Analog Modulation
• Simulator Lab: AM (Amplitude Modulated) Modulation – using Baseband instruments
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC) – do this after the next
MWMS session.

¾ Quadrature Modulator/Demodulator DUT TEST

• Tester Lab 3.2a: Testing DUT Quadrature Modulator using MWReceiver and BBAC
source
• Capturing Baseband I and Q Signals using a Single BBAC digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.2b: Testing DUT Quadrature Demodulator using MWSOURCE and BBAC
digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.3a: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.3 using (VHFAC)
• Tester Lab 3.3b: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.4 using (VHFAC)

™ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX RF MOD SOURCE and MWSRC and MWRECV System Overview
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC)
¾ Digital Modulation
– Tester Lab 3.4: GSM Signal Generation using VHFAC

Module 3 - 62
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

31
 Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

micro
Support
Cabinet
Support
Cabinet

Test Head Test Head

Module 3 - 63
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

MODSRC2700 MOD
MODSRC
MODSRC
2700 SRC
• 2 Card Cage Slots 2700
#1
#2 6000
per Instrument #1
(in the Support Cabinet)

• 2 MODSRC’s per
System – one for
each main SRC

MODSRC6000
• 1 Card Cage Slots
per Instrument
(in the Support Cabinet)

• Connect to same
SRC as MODSRC2700
Support
Cabinet Module 3 - 64
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

32
 Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ MWMS Architecture
1. SEGMENT created with IG-XL software or imported from an external file (.wav)

Sample clock up to 400MHz

2. The modulated signal is created on an IF carrier for

the MWMS IF carrier frequency:
2MHz with 1MHz 1dB BW
VHFAC SRC AUX Output
12MHz with 1.5MHz 1dB BW
or 52MHz with 40MHz 3dB BW
BBAC SRC

Modulated MWSRC MWPORT

Source CC CC

4. The RF signal level is set by the

Source Channel Card and the Port
Channel Card
6 GHz Frequency
Synthesizer 3. A frequency synthesizer up-converts the modulated signal to RF
RF frequency ranges: 50MHz to 2700MHz, or 4000MHz to 6000MHz
Module 3 - 65
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ MWMS Architecture Overview

• A Modulated Source (MWMS) can be added to any MWSRC channel
• The MWMS can be bypassed for normal CW signals
• One VHFAC SRC or BBAC SRC can drive BOTH MWMS options connected to One synthesizer

Mainframe (PACS) Test Head DIB

AUX VHFAC/BBAC
Modsrc2700
Modsrc2700 Output
SRC1
6 GHz SRC2
Frequency Modsrc6000 DIG1 DUT
Synthesizer DIG2

Synth 1
MW GEN4
Synth 2 Modsrc2700
Modsrc2700 SRC1
SRC2
Modsrc6000

Module 3 - 66
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

33
 Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture
¾BBACSRC/BBACDIG Connection Diagram +
100 ohm differential within test head
-
+
IF Signal Connectivity- BBAC is IF Instrument - 100 ohm differential test head to mainframe
All single ended terminations 50 ohms IF from Site 2 50 ohm coax within RF card cage
All differential terminations 100 ohms [RF1 AUX 21F, 21E]
SCC IF In
J2
P B24 T
TT
BBAC DIG2 T + TT
N J2
C24
- T
T
J16
T J19
P B23
BBAC SRC2 + SCC SMA
BBAC Instrument

T
N
C23 - IF Out
J17
J20

P B22
BBAC DIG1 T + SCC
N
C22 -

T
P B21
BBAC SRC1 + J2
T
N
C21 - T

BBAC Aux Connector 21F 21E RF1 Aux ModSrc 1

uW Dedicated Connection Connector

J2
T
IF Out
T

Measure Module T
ModSrc 2

SMA IF In
Microwave Instrument
Test Head Support Cabinet
Module 3 - 67
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ VHFAC SRC/VHFAC DIG Connection Diagram
50 ohm coax within test head
50 ohm coax test head to support cabinet
IF Signal Connectivity- VHFAC is IF Instrument
50 ohm coax within RF Card Cage
All single ended terminations are 50 ohms
IF from
Site 2 J2
TT
TT
VHF DIG1 SCC SMA J2
T T
IF IN T
J16
J19
VHFAC Instrument

T
VHF SRC1 SCC SMA
IF Out
J17
J20

SCC
VHF DIG2
T SCC

T
VHF SRC2 J2

OSP Aux ModSrc 1

VHFAC OSP Aux Connector
Connector
uW Dedicated Connection
J2
T

IF Out
T
ModSrc 2
Measure Module T

SMA IF In
Microwave Instrument Test Head Support Cabinet
Module 3 - 68
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

34
 Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture
¾ FLEX MWMS Configuration
Modulation Microwave Instruments
Synthesizer
[Optional] Noise
3.OSP1
3.OSP2
Main Source 1 3.OSP3
3.OSP4

MW set 1 4.OSP1
4.OSP2
4.OSP3
AWG Input
Receiver 4.OSP4

Main Source 2 3.OSP5

3.OSP6
4.OSP5

SRC1 AUX Out

AWG Input
SRC2 AUX Out

VHFAC
Support Source

SRC1 AUX Out

SRC2 AUX Out
Receiver LO
BBAC

PTS310 GPIO

Support Cabinet Test Head

Module 3 - 69
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ Microwave Debug Displays

Logical Site Debug Display

Module 3 - 70
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

35
 Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ Microwave Debug Displays

Physical Board-
Board-Level Debug Display

Module 3 - 71
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ MWMS Programming Syntax

With thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(Source_Pin) ' UWMS setup
.AWGDisconnect
End With

thehdw.VHFACSource.Pins(Source_Pin).Signals.Add sigName

With thehdw.VHFACSource.Pins(Source_Pin).Signals(sigName) ' VHFAC setup

.SampleRate = FS_Hz
.SampleSize = WaveSize
.WaveDefinitionName = wavedefName ' Specified on the WaveDef sheet
.LoadSettings
End With

With thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(Source_Pin) ' UWMS setup

.Amplitude = Input_Power
.Frequency = RF_Frequency
.AWGConnect "VHFACSource"
.IFFrequency = IF_Hz '= 2 || 12 || 52 MHz
.CrestFactor = CrestFactor_dB
.Connect
End With

Module 3 - 72
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

36
 Module 3: Microwave Modulated Source Architecture

¾ Comparison with MWSource

MWSource MWModulatedSource

Signal Source MWSynthesizer AWG Source and MWMS

Levelling At most 4 times under each RF At most 36 times under each

frequency (4 chans) RF frequency (4 chans, 3 IF
paths, 3 AWG Sources)
Crest Factor Constant Different

MW Synthesizer Used as signal source Used as fixed LO and variable

LO

Module 3 - 73
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: MWMS
3 Steps to Generate a Signal

1. Generate the waveform data and NORMALIZE the data into [-1,1] range

2. Compute the waveform’s CREST FACTOR (CF)

3. Prepare the instrument front end for the modulation waveform

(to be sourced by AWG instrument – BBAC, or VHFAC)
Specify signal properties such as:
Crest Factor for AWG signal
IF Frequency for AWG signal
AWG source
Output amplitude for RF signal
Output frequency for RF signal
(Connect MWMS and Control AWG to start IF signal,
which will make RF signal appear at DUT via MWMS)

Note: CF usage in MW FLEX IG-XL software is different than usage in MW IMAGE software.
(See examples in next few pages.)

Module 3 - 74
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

37
 Module 3: MWMS
Crest Factor

• Definition: Crest factor is the ratio of PEAK to RMS value of a waveform. Crest factor is typically used to compensate for a waveform that has a
low RMS value, but one or more large peaks.

– (Note: A sine wave, which has a crest factor of ~3dB, is used for leveling. The modulation waveform could be any arbitrary waveform,
with any arbitrary crest factor, so there is a difference between the leveling signal and the modulation signal which may need to be
compensated after leveling.)
– Average Power, NOT Peak Power, is what matters for microwave test.
– The BBAC and VHFAC Source is described by peak-to-peak voltage, hence Peak Power.
– A waveform with a high CF (crest factor) will have a much lower average power and since leveling was done with a low CF sine wave, the
output power as seen at the DUT will be lower than that expected.
– To achieve the desired average power at the DUT, the Crest Factor property of the AWG is used on the MWMS.
– For BBAC Source, since its Peak-Peak voltage is controllable, the CREST FACTOR is used to adjust this voltage DIRECTLY to compensate
for non sine wave Crest Factors.
– For VHFAC Source, since its peak-peak voltage is NOT directly controllable, the MWMS amplitude is ADJUSTED by the source channel
card’s (RF2) VCA (voltage controlled attenuator) using the CREST FACTOR to adjust for non sine wave Crest Factor.

• For RF and MWMS Waveforms, the CRESTFACTOR allows for the adjustment of AVERAGE power of the modulated signal by the AWG used by
the MWMS upconversion

• THE MWMS software uses CREST FACTOR in dB format.

• The signal should be amplitude symmetrical (i.e., no DC offset)
– (note, a DC offset will increase the Crest Factor)
• Data should be NORMALIZED into [-1,1] in double format CF = VPEAK / V RMS
• EXAMPLE: CREST_FACTOR(sine) = 1/0.707 = 1.41421 (as ratio) = 3dB (in dB format)
CF (in dB) = 20 log ( CF )
CREST_FACTOR(square wave) = 1/1 = 1 (as ratio) = 0 dB (in dB format)

Module 3 - 75
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: MWMS
Crest Factor (VHFAC)
Steps
If MWMS is used with the VHFAC:

If the source is the VHFAC for the MWMS, then the VCA (voltage controlled attenuator) uses the
CF to achieve user requested output power.
The Crest Factor is used to achieve user requested power level. Cal tables and autocal tables are
used to find the adjustment to the leveling VCA setting necessary to reach the desired
programmed user output power request.

Example: User requests a 1 GHz signal @ -10 dBm but the Crest Factor is +5 dB.
The system will achieve -10 dBm using the VCA on the FLEX/microFLEX MW Source Channel
Card (RF2).
STEPS requiring user action:
i) Calculate Crest Factor (CF)
ii) Provide the CF to the IG-XL software via:
thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(name).crestfactor =

Module 3 - 76
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

38
 Module 3: MWMS
Crest Factor (VHFAC)
VHFAC

CrestFactor dB=20 * log(Signal.CalcMaxAmplitude/Signal.CalcRMS)/log(10#)

VHFAC syntax

‘User requested RF power at DIB

MWMS syntax

‘crest factor will be used to adjust the MWMS channel card’s VCA to achieve user
requested power at DIB

STEPS
i) Calculate Crest Factor (CF)
ii) Provide the CF to thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(name).crestfactor = … (see code
example above

Module 3 - 77
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: MWMS
Syntax Details
With theHdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(pin_string)

– set the output power at DUT input , valid range is [-100dBm,13dBm] for ModSource 2700 & valid range is [-
100dBm,13dBm} for 50Mhz-2700MHz, [-100,10]dBm for 4-6 GHz for MW ModSource 6000
.Amplitude =3.0 ‘in dBm – expected AVERAGE power at DUT plane (MWPort module output)

– set output RF frequency, valid range is [50MHz,2.7GHz] for ModSource 2700 & valid range is
[50Mhz,2700MHz] and [4GHz,6GHz] for ModSource 6000
.Frequency=2E9 ‘ in Hz

– select modulator: either BBAC Source, [50MHz, 2700MHz] for both MS2700 and MS6000, either VHFAC
Source [50MHz,2700MHz] for both MS2700 and MS6000 and [4000MHz,6000MHz] for MS6000, or either
MW Source.
.AWGConnect ‘ where AWG is one of above

– select IF frequency: valid range is [1.5,2.5]MHz, [11.25,12.75]MHz,[32,72]MHz for Mod Source 2700 and
ModSource 6000
.IFFrequency=2E6 ‘in Hz this is IF carrier frequency of signal output from AWG instrument (or modulation
input into ModSource. Determines which IF path in ModSrc will be switched in. Three paths are 2/12/52
MHz center freq. paths.)

– specify crest factor of waveform

.CrestFactor = 3.0 ‘in dB (not in ratio)

– Connect ModSource logically, so that this virtual instrument can use Microwave hardware and source signal
.Connect Note: See lab code solutions for full code examples
End with

Module 3 - 78
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

39
 Module 3: MWMS
Crest Factor (BBAC)
Steps
If MWMS is used with the BBAC

If the source is the BBAC for the MWMS then the Vpk–pk of BBAC is adjusted using
CF( crest factor) directly, that is by the BBAC onboard gain capability, not via the
MWMS VCA as is done with the VHFAC.

STEPS requiring user action

i) Calculate CF (crest factor)
ii) Provide the CF to the MW IG-XL software via:
thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(name).crestfactor=
i) Vpp is read from MW IG-XL software via:
thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(name)
Vpp=.AWG.PeakToPeakVoltage
(note: software calculated Vpp from CF)

i) Provide Vpp to MW IG-XL software via:

thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(name).Vpp=

Module 3 - 79
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: MWMS
Crest Factor (BBAC)
MWMS CrestFactor dB=20 * log(Signal.CalcMaxAmplitude/Signal.CalcRMS)/log(10#)

BBAC
syntax

‘User requested RF power at DIB

MWMS
syntax
‘Calculated by user
‘User reads back Vpp from system

BBAC With thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(MWModsrcPin)

.Vpp=Vpp
syntax End With

Vpeak–peak of BBAC is adjusted using CF( crest factor) directly:

STEPS
i) Calculate CF (crest factor)
ii) Provide the CF to thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(name).crestfactor=
(see code example above)
i) Vpp is read from thehdw.MWModulatedSource.Pins(name)
Vpp=.AWG.PeakToPeakVoltage = ( note: software calculated Vpp from CF)
Module 3 - 80
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002 ii) Provide Vpp to thehdw.BBACSource.Pins(name).Vpp=

40
 Module 3: MWMS
Summary: Crest Factor Use by AWGs

Crest Factor Use to achieve required average power of Modulated Waveform

MWMS/BBAC MWMS/VHFAC
1. Generate waveform data and NORMALIZE the data into [-1,1] range
2. Compute waveform’s CREST FACTOR
3. Prepare the instrument front end for the modulation waveform
4. Connect MWMS and Control AWG to start IF signal,
which will make RF signal appear at DUT via MWMS
•AMP adj. on VHFAC front end is
•Vpp is adjusted via crest factor to
bypassed, average power is
adjust AMP adj. on BBAC front end
achieved via MWMS directly
adjusting power using crest factor.

•When the BBAC is used as •When VHFAC is AWG, the actual

the AWG for the MWMS, its amplitude to be sourced will be
Vpp is controllable. internally adjusted by the CREST
•The MWMS will compute the FACTOR via this equation:
Vpp (peak-peak) for BBAC
according to the CREST Internal Sourcing amplitude (after
FACTOR. leveling) = user input amplitude -
•The USER must read back 3dB +CrestFactor, where 3dB is the
this value using VBT crest factor of the sine wave used
as the leveling signal

Module 3 - 81
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 3_1 Modulation _AM (amplitude modulation)

MWMS using BBAC

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-79 MRP-Rev 002

41
 Lab 3_1 Modulation _AM (amplitude modulation)
MWMS using BBAC

TEST: AM Signal
LOOPBACK CABLE

Generation
RF_in(Thur_in)ÆSource Pin RF_out(Thru_out)ÆReceivePin
3.osp2 4.osp2

MWMSRC
.Frequency=sourcefrequency
RF X IF
MWRECEIVER
.AmplitudeExpectedÆ
ÆOutput_mod_freq=890MHz sourcepower
LO
.IFFrequency=2048000 sourcefrequency=890MHz
.amplitude=RefPower=0 .IFFreqencyÆIFFreq=2048000
LO
Set by
X RF .CrestFactor=CrestFactor Recv_gain=0
RF_freq=890MHz Fs=sample_rate=16384000*2
system Hz
IF =2.048MHz BBAC(source) N=sample_size=8192*2
Fs=65536000=SampleRate *note Am_mod_capture

N=1024 Basebandcap

INPUT waveform:
modulation_signal

*note- for MWMS

Vpp=.AWGVoltage is read when using the BBAC
LAB TIME
and is not used by the VHFAC.
*note- for AWG, .Amplitued is used when using
the BBAC(set to Vpp) and not used by the VHFAC
Module 3 - 83
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 3_1 Modulation _AM (amplitude modulation)

MWMS using VHFAC

TEST: AM Signal
LOOPBACK CABLE

Generation
RF_in(Thur_in)ÆSource Pin
RF_out(Thru_out)ÆReceivePin
3.osp2
4.osp2

MWMSRC
.Frequency=sourcefrequency
RF X IF
MWRECEIVER
.AmplitudeExpectedÆ
Æ sourcepower
LO
.IFFrequency=2048000 sourcefrequency=890MHz
.amplitude=RefPower=0 .IFFreqencyÆIFFreq=5MHz
LO
Set by
X RF .CrestFactor=CrestFactor Recv_gain=0
RF_freq=890MHz Fs=16384000*2 Hz
system
N=8192*2
IF =5MHz VHFAC(source) Am_mod_capture
Fs=65536000=SampleRate *note Basebandcap
N=1024

INPUT waveform:
modulation_signal

*note- for MWMS

Vpp=.AWGVoltage is read when using the BBAC
LAB TIME
and is not used by the VHFAC.
*note- for AWG, .Amplitued is used when using
the BBAC(set to Vpp) and not used by the VHFAC
Module 3 - 84
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

42
 Module 3: FLEX RF Modulation System Overview

¾ Module Objectives

¾ Analog Modulation
• Simulator Lab: AM (Amplitude Modulated) Modulation – using Baseband instruments
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC) – do this after the next
MWMS session.

¾ Quadrature Modulator/Demodulator DUT TEST

• Tester Lab 3.2a: Testing DUT Quadrature Modulator using MWReceiver and BBAC
source
• Capturing Baseband I and Q Signals using a Single BBAC digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.2b: Testing DUT Quadrature Demodulator using MWSOURCE and BBAC
digitizer
• Tester Lab 3.3a: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.a above using the (VHFAC)
• Tester Lab 3.3b: Perform Tester Lab 3.2.b above using the (VHFAC)

¾ FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX RF MOD SOURCE and MWSRC and MWRECV System Overview
• Tester Lab 3.1: AM modulation using the BBAC (or VHFAC)
™ Digital Modulation
– Tester Lab 3.4: GSM Signal Generation using VHFAC

Module 3 - 85
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Introduction to Digital Modulation

Source
Source Encoder
Encoder Channel
Channel Encoder
Encoder Modulator
Modulator

b(t) = baseband encoded baseband sRF(t) = modulated

data (bits) data (symbols) signal
Transmitter

Communication Channel

Receiver

b(t) = recovered baseband decoded baseband

data (bits) data (symbols)

Decoder
Decoder Channel
Channel Decoder
Decoder Demodulator
Demodulator
rRF(t) = received
signal
Module 3 - 86
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

43
 Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Advantages of Digital Modulation

• Noise immunity
• All-digital environment
• Digital signal processing
• Error detection and correction
• Increased channel capacity due to multiplexing and multiple access

Module 3 - 87
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Digital Modulation Techniques

Signal Types

Scalar Vector Time - Variant

Multiplexed systems

AM FM QAM FSK MSK QPSK TDMA CDMA

Quadrature Time division

Amplitude multiple access
modulation Amplitude
Modulation

Frequency Frequency Shift

modulation Keying

Minimum Shift Keying

Code division
Quadrature Phase Shift multiple access
Keying

Module 3 - 88
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

44
 Module 3: Digital Modulation

Original Signal ¾ Digital Communication

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Communication Channel
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Decision Circuitry
Reconstructed Signal

In digital communications signal 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

processing can be used to overcome the
distorting effects of the communication channel
Module 3 - 89
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Transmitter Design: Three Parameters of a Sinusoid

s (t ) = A cos(ω ct + θ )

Amplitude Frequency Phase

Digital Modulations:
• Amplitude shift keying (ASK)
• Phase shift keying (PSK)
• Frequency shift keying (FSK)
• Quadrature Amplitude modulation (QAM)

Module 3 - 90
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

45
 Module 3: Digital Modulation
¾ Transmitter Design: ASK, FSK, PSK
Baseband bits modulate the 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
carrier in three ways:

Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK)

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)

Phase Shift Keying (PSK)

Module 3 - 91
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Vector & Constellation Diagrams

• Vector diagram provides Q s(t)

valuable information
about a signal’s modulation
characteristics

• Constellation diagram is
a vector plot showing the
signal at its decision values

Module 3 - 92
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

46
 Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Bits Encoded to Symbols

A Binary shift keyed modulated signal has 2 levels, where each corresponds
to either a 0 or 1 bit value (2-ary)

M-ary shift keying is the general case where the modulated signal has M
levels, where each level corresponds to a set of baseband digital bits

The number of possible M-ary levels is given by:

where,
M is the number of possible modulated levels (where a level can be
described by a signal’s amplitude, phase, or frequency)
b is the number of bits required to represent by each symbol # bits

# signal levels M = 2b
Example:
Example: ‘4ASK’
‘4ASK’ is
is aa 4-ary
4-ary modulation
modulation scheme,
scheme,
M
M== 22bb =
= 2222 =
= 44
Æ The
Æ The modulated
modulated signal
signal has
has 44 possible
possible levels
levels
Æ Each
Æ Each symbol
symbol is
is represented
represented (requires)
(requires) by
by 22 baseband
baseband bits
bits

Module 3 - 93
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Gaussian Filter
Discontinuities in waveform parameters result in high frequency components within the
waveform’s spectrum
By filtering the encoded phase with a Gaussian filter, the spectral side lobes are significantly
reduced

The filter shape (degree of filtering) is controlled by the bandwidth time product (BT) parameter:
0 < BT < 1

Gaussian filtering introduces intersymbol interference; e.g., after filtering each symbol level
(phase in this case) will “ spread” into adjacent symbol regions, creating a degree of
interference

The lower the BT:

the greater reduction in spectral sidelobes
the more intersymbol interference introduced

Module 3 - 94
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

47
 Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ Gaussian Filtered Signal

unfiltered phase ramp

BT = 0.75 BT = 0.5

BT = 0.25

time

Module 3 - 95
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Digital Modulation

¾ GMSK (Gaussian Minumum Shift Key)

• Type of digital modulation used by GSM, DCS1800, CDPD

• Closely related to GFSK (used by DECT, CT2)
• Continuous envelope (phase modulation only)
• Less energy per transmitted bit
• Less efficient use of bandwidth

Module 3 - 96
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

48
 Module 3: Digital Modulation
¾ GMSK Example

SR = 1.024 MHz β = 0.5 BT = 0.5

f dev = 256 kHz Δθ decision = π 2

all sample points

time

frequency
only decision
Module 3points
- 97
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Relations: Bit Sequence to I & Q Segments

The number of bits

is either given by
The Symbol Rate, SR the customer or
SR, is defined by #bits may be chosen to
the device spec. suit the application

The number of
symbols is derived
from the number of
The VHFAC
bits and defined by
sampling rate FS is
usually chosen to be
FS #Symbols the modulation
scheme:
>4 times SR.
Additionally, the FS # bits
is also a multiple of
# symbols =
bits per symbol
the SR, the Symbol
Rate
FS > 4 ⋅ SR SSIZE
The Wave Size for the
VHFAC is related to the
SR, #symbols: SSIZE FS
# symbols ⋅ FS SPS = =
SSIZE = # symbols SR
SR
Module 3 - 98
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

49
 Module 3: Relations: Bit Sequence to IF Segment

The bandwidth of The number of

the modulated bits is either given
SR signal is
The Symbol Rate,
SR, is defined by BW determined by #bits by the customer or
may be chosen to
the device spec. the symbol rate suit the application
and the type of
modulation
The number of
symbols is derived
The VHFAC sampling MWMS The MWMS IF
is centered at
from the number of
bits and defined by
rate FS is usually
chosen to be >4
FS IF either 2, 12, or #Symbols the modulation
32 MHz. scheme:
times IF.
Additionally, the FS # bits
# symbols =
is also a multiple of bits per symbol
the SR, the Symbol
Rate
SSIZE
FS > 4 ⋅ IF
The Segment Size for the
VHFAC is related to the SR,
#symbols: # symbols ⋅ FS SSIZE FS
SSIZE = SPS = =
SR # symbols SR
Module 3 - 99
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Steps to Create a GFSK Modulated Segment

1. Determine the VHFAWG wave parameters.

2. Create bit sequence.
3. Encode symbol levels using bits.
4. Create FSK phase.
5. Gaussian filter phase.
6. Modulate the UWMS IF carrier phase.
7. Create VHFAWG wave.

Module 3 - 100
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

50
 Module 3: Quadrature Modulation
¾ Modulation Schemes applications
MSK, GMSK GSM standard

BPSK cable modem,deep space

telemetry
cable modem, CDMA,
QPSK, π /4DQPSK NADC,TETRA

OQPSK CDMA, satellite

FSK, GFSK DECT, paging, AMPS, CT2,

Bluetooth

8PSK satellite

16PSK microwave radio, modems

32QAM terrestrial microwave

64QAM modems

256QAM modems, digital video (US)

Module 3 - 101
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 3_4 GSM Signal Generation

MWMS using VHFAC

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-79 MRP-Rev 002

51
 Lab 3_4 GSM Signal Generation
MWMS Using VHFAC

TEST: GSM Signal

LOOPBACK CABLE

Generation
RF_in(PUT)
RF_out(PUT)
3.osp1
4.osp1

X
MWMSRC
RF MWRECEIVER
.amplitude (carrier) IF
Mdsrc_fs=.270833*32=
Receiver level = 0dB
8.666656 LO
IF_Freq=recv_if=
Mdsrc_if=2.00003822851563=
=270833*8=2166664Hz
LO
X RF
3781*(.270833*32)/16384
Md_sr_size=16384
IFFilter=10MHz
Set by RF_freq=1.9GHz Fs=34666624Hz
system Crestfactor=3
N=16384=capture_size
IF Power_in=(-20) Cap_gsm =captured
IF=270833*8=2166664 wavename

Fs=8666656=270833*32
N= 16384

INPUT waveform:
VBT_GSM_IF=gsmIF

*note- for MWMS

Vpp=.AWGVoltage is read when using the BBAC LAB TIME
and is not used by the VHFAC.
*note- for AWG, .Amplitued is used when using
the BBAC(set to Vpp) and not used by the VHFAC Module 3 - 103
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 3: Review

¾ On completion of this module the student should be able to:

9 Understand the Modulation Instruments in the FLEX/microFLEX Tester

9 Understand common Analog Modulation Schemes
9 Create common Modulated Waveforms
9 Understand and perform common Modulation Tests

Module 3 - 104
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

52
M O D U L E 4

Module

4
Module 4 covers:

One-Port S-Parameter
 Module 4: Objectives

¾ On completion of this module the student should

be able to:

• Understand how to make one-port S-parameter

measurements using the FLEX/microFLEX Tester Microwave
software and hardware.

– Reference basic T-line theory for microwave ATE.

Module 4- 1
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: FLEX/microFLEX
FLEX/microFLEX One-
One-port S-
S-parameters

¾ Module Objectives
¾ One-
One-port S-
S-parameters
¾ One port S-
S-parameter measurement
¾ Lab 4_1 S-
S-1 P

Module 4- 2
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

1
 Module 4: One-
One-Port S-
S-parameter Measurement

¾ Definitions:

• S-parameters describe the reflection and transmission characteristics of N-port

networks. For instance, an amplifier has two ports: the input and the output, while a
termination resistor only has one.
• One port devices can be represented with one complex number, the coefficient
of reflection, as a function of frequency. (One port devices have only an input
impedance.)
• The VBT object that will represent them is called an S1P:

Dim Gamma As S1P

Dim gamma_ang As Double
Dim gamma_mag As Double

‘Allocate Memory for Gamma S1P Object through MVNA Driver

Set Gamma = thehdw.MWVNA.GetS1P
…
‘Retrieve Magnitude and Angle from S1P Object
gamma_mag = Gamma.ExtractMagnitude
gamma_ang = Gamma.ExtractAngle

Module 4- 3
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ Definitions:

• Coefficients of reflection are commonly represented by a capital Greek Gamma (Γ)

• A key concept to understanding s-parameters is impedance matching. When a

signal is traveling along a wire with a particular impedance and encounters a
different impedance, as with a termination resistor, an adapter, or a printed circuit
board trace with different geometry, part of the signal is reflected back. These
reflections affect the amplitude of the signals we source and measure when testing
devices, increasing the complexity and uncertainty of our calibration

– These reflections have both magnitude and phase, resulting in constructive or

destructive interference which changes with frequency as the number of fractional
wavelengths between the reflections changes. This results in “ripple” as you sweep
across frequency. For microwave testing, we try to match each port/plane to a
constant 50 ohm impedance to minimize these effects. (There are many devices
with non-50 ohm impedances of which cable TV is probably the best known at 75
ohms.)

Module 4- 4
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

2
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement
¾ Math and Diagram representations:

z − z0
Γ= (z0 = 50 ohms)
z + z0

Schematic representation
1-port 2-port
s21 - gain

s11 - s22 -
Γ input match output match

s12 - isolation

Flow diagram representation

s21

Γ s11 s22

s12

Module 4- 5
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ Γ, Γin, s11, s12, s21, s22 and Γload

• Two port devices can be represented with four complex numbers corresponding
to two coefficients of reflection, one for the input and one for the output, and
two gains, one forward and one reverse. In an amplifier, the input match is a
function of its input impedance, the output match is a function of its output
impedance, and the forward gain is what is commonly called “gain,” and the
reverse gain is commonly called “isolation.” Some devices, such as cables, don’t
really have “forward” and “reverse” directions, so one port is arbitrarily
assigned the number 1, and the other port is referred to as number 2.

• The coefficient of reflection at port 1 is called s11 and the coefficient of

reflection at port 2 is s22. Gain from port 1 to port 2 is s21 and the gain from
port 2 to port 1 is s12.

• Note that while Γ, s11, and s22 are all coefficients of reflection, there are
implications behind s11 and s22 that there are other ports on the device which
can influence the actual coefficient of reflection at a given port. For example,
looking into port 1 on a 2-port network where there is a termination with some
Γ load on port 2, you get Γ in in next slide.

Module 4- 6
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

3
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ Γ, Γin, s11, s12, s21, s22 and Γload

s21

Γ in = s11 s22 Γ load

s12

s 21 s12 Γload Gamma looking into 2-port network

Γin = s11 +
1 − s 22 Γload

Module 4- 7
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement
¾ VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio):

VSWR stands for Voltage Standing Wave Ratio, which refers to the standing
waves formed in a transmission line with a sine wave in it when there are
impedance mismatches. The ratio of the high voltage to the low voltage
measured in the line can be used to determine VSWR directly. VSWR is
commonly represented as a ratio: 1:1 is ideal, 1.5:1 is usually pretty good, and
2:1 is usually considered poor.

1+ Γ
VSWR =
1− Γ

¾ RL (Return Loss):
Return Loss is also commonly used for mismatch in device specifications. It is a
power rather than a voltage quantity

( )
RL = −10 log10 Γ
2

dBMag = 10 log10 Γ ( ) 2

Module 4- 8
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

4
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement
(FLEX Gen4 Microwave)
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 4- 9
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ Signal Path for the Microwave Vector Network Analyzer (MWVNA)

Module 4- 10
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

5
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ MWVNA Operation
• Signal Generation
A connection is made between the VNA instrument channel and the device pin that is to be
measured. A sine wave signal is generated and sent to the device pin using the Microwave
subsystem’s synthesizer (synthesizer #3). The signal’s frequency is programmable to
between 50 MHz and 6 GHz, but its amplitude is fixed at -32 dBm.

• Forward and Reflected Signals

Along its path to the device pin, the signal passes through a dual-directional coupler and
switch that reads the forward and reflected signal components. The forward and reflected
signals are mixed together to produce an RF signal that is modulated with a LO signal from
another Microwave subsystem synthesizer. The resulting IF signal is then captured by the
Microwave Receiver’s on-board digitizer.

• Signal Capture and Processing

The Microwave VNA performs DSP analysis on the captured data to find the power of each
of the waves. Using the power values of the forward and reflected waves, you can then
determine the input reflection coefficient, which is the ratio of the power that is reflected
from the load.

Module 4- 11
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement
¾ MWVNA Programming and Syntax

‘Variables declaration
Dim AChan As String
Dim Gamma As S1P
Dim GammaList As S1PList
Dim gamma_ang As Double
Dim gamma_mag As Double
Dim return_loss(10) As Double
Dim i As Long
Dim RF_freq As Double

‘Allocate Memory for S1P and S1PList Object from MWVNA Driver
Set Gamma = thehdw.MWVNA.GetS1P
Set GammaList = thehdw.MWVNA.GetS1PList

thehdw.MWVNA.Pins(AChan).Waveforms.Add ""

Module 4- 12
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

6
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ MWVNA Programming and Syntax (cont’d)

For i = 0 To 6
Dim SiteNum As Long
SiteNum = 0
RF_freq = 2410000000# + 20000000 * i
‘Set up MWVNA frequency, connect and trigger it
thehdw.MWVNA.Pins(AChan).Frequency = RF_freq '2460000000# 'Frequency
thehdw.MWVNA.Pins(AChan).Connect
thehdw.MWVNA.Pins(AChan).Waveforms.Trigger
‘Performing Calibrated One-Port Sparameter Measurement
Set Gamma = thehdw.MWVNA.Pins(AChan).GetGammaBySite(RF_freq, SiteNum)
Call GammaList.AppendS1P(Gamma)
gamma_mag = Gamma.ExtractMagnitude
gamma_ang = Gamma.ExtractAngle
return_loss(i) = 20 * Log(gamma_mag) / Log(10)
Next i

Module 4- 13
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ Measurement Results
Dim RL_0 As Double
Dim RL_1 As Double
…

RL_0 = return_loss(0)
RL_1 = return_loss(1)
RL_2 = return_loss(2)
RL_3 = return_loss(3)
RL_4 = return_loss(4)
RL_5 = return_loss(5)
RL_6 = return_loss(6)

‘Write/Append Data Results to a File

Call GammaList.File.WriteAppend("SparamFile.s1p")

Module 4- 14
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

7
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement

¾ Smith Display Tool

Run as an executable (above) Æ c:>smithdisplay

or from within a program debug function (below)

Public Function plot_smith_chart() As Long

Dim filepath As String
Dim bar As New S1PList

filepath = "C:\myData\SParameterFiles\SparamFile_try.s1p"
bar.File.Read filepath
bar.Plot
' bar.Clear

Module 4- 15
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 4_1 S1P (one port S-

S-parameter)

LAB TIME

PN 553-401-78 MRP- Rev 002

8
 Lab 4_1 S1P (one port S-
S-parameter)
Port Noise
Source

From Main Source1 Main

Coupler
Synthesizer RF I/Os
“A”
OSP ports

From Main Source2 Main

Coupler RF I/Os
Synthesizer
“B”
LNA OSP ports

Support
TCM RF I/Os
From Support Source Typ. DUT LO’s
Synthesizer TCM
“LO” OSP ports

From Receiver LO
Receiver
DIB Access
Synthesizer LO Phase
Detector

BBAC DIG
VHFAC DIG
On-Board DIG DIB Access

Module 4- 17
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Lab 4_1 S1P (one port S-

S-parameter)

TEST: S1P using VNA

OnePort_pin
4.osp5

Gamma=thehdw.MWVNA.Pins(AChan).GetGammaBySite(RF_feq,SiteNum)
VNA
VNA channel=AChannel=OnePort_Pin
Call GammaList.AppendS1P(Gamma)
Gamma=thehdw.MWVNA.GetS1P
GammaList=…GetS1PList
Gamma_mag=Gamma.ExtractMagnitude
Gamma_ang=Gamma.ExtractAnlge
RL(returnloss(i))=20*log(gamma_mag)/log(10)
[i=0to6]

LAB TIME

Module 4- 18
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

9
 Module 4: One-
One-Port Sparameter Measurement
Lab 4_1 Summary
¾ LAB: S1P One-Port Sparameter Measurement

• Instructions: refer to Lab guide, Lab Solutions, and Student Lab framework.

path to class materials: \\xxx\LAB GUIDES\

Lab4_1 Instructions for S1P.doc

Module 4- 19
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

10
M O D U L E 5

Module

5
Module 5 covers:

S-Parameter Calibration
Receiver NF Calibration
ENR Calibration
 Module 5 : Objectives

¾ Upon completion of this module the student should

be able to:

• Understand and perform One-Port S-Parameter Calibration

• Understand and perform System Noise Figure Calibration

• Understand and perform ENR Calibration

Module 5 - 1
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: Calibration Operation

¾ Module Objectives
™ Microwave Calibration kit
¾ Perform One-
One-port S parameters Calibration
¾ System Noise Figure Calibration
¾ ENR Calibration
¾ MW Calibration SW

Module 5 - 2
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

1
 Module 5: Microwave CalDIB kit - HW
¾ Introduction

To perform a 1-Port S-parameters, System

Noise Figure and ENR Calibration a CalDIB kit
which includes a MW FLEX Calibration DIB
(CalDIB), 2 Calmodules (OSL and THRU) and
a ribbon cable which allows communication
between the calmodules EEPROM circuitry
and the CalDIB digital circuitry is used.

The flow of events and steps to be taken during

the calibration is controlled by the CalDIB GUI
which communicates with the CalDIB digital
circuitry.

MW Cal DIB
THRU Calmodule
OSL Calmodule
ribbon cable

Module 5 - 3
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: Microwave Calibration kit - HW

¾ MW Calibration DIB (MW CalDIB)

The MW CalDIB locks on the test

Head at the DIB interface allowing the
OSPs to be visible. A latching mechanism
attaches one or a set of Calibration
Modules (OSL or THRU CalModule) to
the OSP interface.

During the calibration process the MW

CalDIB software program prompts the
user to place identified Calmodule (OSL
or THRU) and guides the user through
the entire operation.

Module 5 - 4
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

2
 Module 5: Microwave CalDIB kit - HW

¾ MW Calibration DIB (MW CalDIB) locked on tester

The MW CalDIB must be

manually locked on the test head
prompted by CalDIB software
program for calibration to proceed

If the CalDIB placed on the test

head is not detected (serial ID not
recognized or never burned on
DIB EEPROM) the software keeps on
requesting that a DIB be placed on
test head

OSP interface
Ribbon cable connector interface
MW Cal DIB digital circuitry
Module 5 - 5
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: Microwave CalDIB kit - HW

¾ OSLNV Calmodule (bottom view)

The OSLNV Calmodule includes the

following standards:

- Open Std (O)

- Short Std (S)
- 50 ohm Load Std (L)
- Characterized Noise Source (N)
-20 dB offset Verification Std (V)

PIN diode switching technology is

3.osp1
used to select OSLV Stds and to
route Noise signals to OSPs 4.osp1

Module 5 - 6
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

3
 Module 5: Microwave CalDIB kit - HW

¾ THRU Calmodule (bottom view)

THRU module includes cables that

connect Noise Source side of the
Port Module to LNA /MWreceiver
Side and allows Hot and Cold noise
captures as well as Reflection
coefficient measurements of Noise
3.osp4 4.osp4
Source and MWReceiver
3.osp3 4.osp3
3.osp2 4.osp2
Noise Source LNA/MWReceiver
3.osp1 4.osp1

Module 5 - 7
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB kit - HW

¾ Calibration Files & EEPROM data
EEPROM
O S L N V Software
EEPROM THRU
Software
Files
Files
File Name S1PLISTL__00000009
File Name OSLCAL__00000009

File Name S2PR__00000008

File Name ENR__00000008
Verify
Noise
Short
Open

Load

EEPROM
EEPROM

switch
Ribbon Cable Ribbon Cable

•MWBoard_MWNoiseFigureCal__700_990_MHz_2_120104_190911 THRU- used for ENR loopback

*Verification is 11-18 dB •MWBoard_MWENRCal__700_990_MHz_2_120104_190911
measurement, stores S
offset load parameters characteristics
•MWBoard_OnePortVNACal__700_990_MHz_2_120104_190911

Module 5 - 8
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

4
 Module 5: Calibration Operation

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Microwave Calibration kit
™ Perform One-
One-port S-
S-parameter Calibration
¾ System Noise Figure Calibration
¾ ENR Calibration
¾ MW Calibration SW

Module 5 - 9
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: One-
One-Port Sparameter Calibration
¾ Overview
- One Port sparameter measurements made on embedded system are calibrated
at run time

- During S1P-calibration, multiple MWVNA triggers are performed to make raw

measurements of O (Open), S (Short), L (Load), and Verification (V) standards
at each frequency (596) and for each channel (11)

- MWVNA software automatically reads (when performing a calibrated one-port

sparameter measurement) and writes (during calibration process in
Maintenance Environment) calfiles in the IG-XL\Cal\MWBoard-4 directory

- Registering calfiles information such as time stamp, cal type, and cal validity is
handled by the CalDIB program which communicates with CalService Database

- At run time, MWVNA driver “compares” characteristic (ideal) data of OSL

standards with their raw measurements and generates EAs (Error Adapters)

Module 5 - 10
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

5
 Module 5: One-
One-Port Sparameters Calibration
¾ Error Adapters (EAs)
An Error Adapter( EA) is a mathematical construct that assumes that we have an
ideal VNA with a non-ideal “Adapter” in front of it. For 1-port calibrations, we
use a 3-term error adapter, or EA3. The terms of a 3-term error adapter are es,
ed, and er, for Effective Source match, Effective Directivity, and Effective
Reflection tracking.

Source match describes how the VNA interacts with the device, while Directivity
and Reflection tracking describes how effectively the couplers pick up the signal
reflected from the DUT vs. the signal sourced toward the DUT. (Directivity
describes how much of the signal sourced toward the DUT leaks into the
measurement of the reflected signal. An ideal directional coupler would have
perfect directivity, or only pick up signals traveling in one direction, toward or
away from the DUT.)

Twelve term error adapters are used for 2-port measurements. They include
two EA3s plus transmission plus transmission tracking, load match, and
isolation in each direction.

Module 5 - 11
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: One-
One-Port Sparameters Calibration
¾ Error Adapter Adapters concept and OSL stds

s21s12 ΓL ( s ) 2 ΓL
ΓIN = s11 + = s11 + T
1 − s22 ΓL 1 − s22 ΓL
es ed
sT
Internal measurement er
reference plane
EA3s
sT
3 known calibration
source s 11 s22 ΓL standards: O, S, and L
sT
ΓIN Reference plane of
calibration

Module 5 - 12
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

6
 Module 5: One Port Sparameters Calibration

¾ Error Adapter concept and OSL stds (cont’

(cont’d)

EA3s may be represented by three frequency-dependent 2-port parameters:

input reflection coefficient s11, output reflection coefficient s22, and a
transmission coefficient sT= s12= s21

These parameters (s11, s12 and s22) can be determined by three independent
measurements using three known terminations known as O (Open), S (Short),
and L (Load)

By solving a system of linear equations, the EA3s are found

In practical measurements due to small errors, approximation techniques are

necessary in the final computing of EA3s

Module 5 - 13
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: Module 5: Calibration Operation

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Microwave Calibration kit
¾ Perform One-
One-port S-
S-parameter Calibration
™ System Noise Figure Calibration
¾ ENR Calibration
¾ MW Calibration SW

Module 5 - 14
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

7
 Module 5: MW Receiver Noise Figure Calibration

¾ MWReceiver Noise Figure Calibration Process

OSLNV module Plane 0

Noise Source
ENR,Γcold, Γhot OSP Plane cal data
Cascade to OSLNV EEPROM
equations (GA of cables, Γcold,
Γhot, ENR at OSP)
S-parameters of
OSLNV cables

Plane 1
4.osp1
4.osp2

4.osp4
4.osp3

LNA/MWReceiver

Y Factor Method,
OSP Plane
Te, F, NF(dB)
NF = ENR(dB) -10log10 (Y-1)
Module 5 - 15
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MWReceiver Noise Figure Calibration

¾ Cal Planes
O S L N V
EEPROM
Verify
Noise
Short
Open

Plane 0
Load

Characterized by Noise Source vendor

Removed via calibration

switch
Characterized by Teradyne Factory Hardware Engineering

Plane 1

*Verification is 15-20 dB
offset load

Module 5 - 16
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

8
 Module 5: Calibration Operation

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Microwave Calibration kit
¾ Perform One-
One-port S-
S-parameter Calibration
¾ System Noise Figure Calibration
™ ENR Calibration
¾ MW Calibration SW

Module 5 - 17
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: ENR Calibration

¾ Internal Noise Source ENR Calibration Process

4.osp1
4.osp2
4.osp3
4.osp4

THRU Module
S-parameters of cables

OSP Plane
3.osp1
3.osp2

3.osp4
3.osp3

Noise
Source LNA/MWReceiver

Microwave Port Module

Module 5 - 18
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

9
 Module 5: ENR Calibration

¾ Internal Noise Source ENR Calibration Process

THRU

EEPROM 3osp1
4osp1

DIB slot 3
A38 A1 .osp6 .osp5 .osp4 .osp3 .osp2 .osp1
Pogo Pins
D38 D1
N/C .osp5 .osp4 .osp3 .osp2 .osp1
DIB slot 4
1. Internal ENR paths connected to MWReceiver (loopback with calibrated THRU module)
2. Γhot, Γcold of Noise Source path measured
3. MWReceiver NF previously measured during system NF calibration, MWReceiver Γ measured
4. Y-Factor measurement determines ENR
Module 5 - 19
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: Calibration Operation

¾ Module Objectives
¾ Microwave Calibration kit
¾ Perform One-
One-port S-
S-parameter Calibration
¾ System Noise Figure Calibration
¾ ENR Calibration
™ MW Calibration SW

Module 5 - 20
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

10
 Module 5: MWCalDIB - SW
¾ Order of Cals
1. VNA Calibration
a. Need O, S, L V (standard characteristic data stored on EEPROM – measured by
FACTORY hardware engineering)
b. Driver performs RAW measurements of OSL stds using coupler
c. When a 1-port S-parameter measurement is made, the MWVNA driver applies the
correct EA3s to produce a calibrated complex value
d. Verify standard allows verification of each RAW measurements per Freq performing
a calibrated measurement of Verify std. and comparing it against its characteristic
data downloaded from OSLNV module EEPROM
e. All the above is done over 11 channels for S-parameters
2. MWReceiver NF Calibration
a. Done over 4 channels on the LNA side of Port Module
b. Requires VNA calibration to measure Receiver Reflection Coefficient (Gamma)
3. Noise Source ENR Calibration
a. Connections are made between Noise Source chans (4) and LNA chans (4) (THRU)
b. Requires VNA calibration and NF calibration to measure Receiver Reflection
coefficient and Noise Source Reflection coefficients (hot/cold)

Module 5 - 21
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW

¾ Cal Prerequisite Order

1 VNA cal

2
NF cal
Requires VNA calibration for Receiver Gamma
measurement

3
ENR cal Requires VNA calibration for Gamma measurements
Requires NF calculation for ENR calculation

Module 5 - 22
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

11
 Module 5: MW CalDIB – SW
¾ Launching Maintenance Environment

The MWCalDIB program is run from the

Maintenance Environment (ME)

From the Start Menu in Windows, select

Teradyne IG-XL >>Maintenance

Module 5 - 23
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Maintenance Environment windows

The Teradyne FLEX Maintenance window pops up

Followed by the Maintenance window interface

Module 5 - 24
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

12
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Cal Types and Frequency ranges

Under Calibration Tab, expand on MWBoard

and select Frequency Range and Frequency
type (VNA, Noise Figure and ENR) to be
performed by respecting Cal Prerequisite
order

Module 5 - 25
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Calibration parameters and GUI start

Run Button

Once Frequency ranges and cal types are

selected, click the Run button OR the
Calibrate button to launch the CalDIB GUI

The MWBoard Calibration window will pop

up. Click OK and follow instructions on CalDIB
GUI

Calibrate Button

Module 5 - 26
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

13
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ MW CalDIB GUI GUI blinks until CalDIB is locked on
Test Head and Confirm button pressed

The CalDIB GUI then shows up.

The CalDIB must mounted on
the test head and locked. Click
the Confirm button to start
resetting and powering the
CalDIB. During the Reset
process, the LEDs on the DIB
light up.

Module 5 - 27
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Powering Cal DIB

If powering the DIB succeeds, the green power LED

stays lit up on the CalDIB

Module 5 - 28
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

14
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Starting Calibration

All Calibration parameters have been set,

Click the Go Button to start calibration

Module 5 - 29
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Mounting and powering OSLNV Calmodule

CalDIB GUI prompts operator to

Mount OSLNV calmodule on the
DIB using latching mechanism.

Then CalDIB program powers the

CalModule and reads its serial
number information from EEPROM

IF the CalModule EEPROM header

data is read successfully, the
program starts downloading
characteristic data from EEPROM
if missing from Cal directory

Module 5 - 30
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

15
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ OSLNV eeprom data download (OSL characteristic data)

First, OSL characteristic data is downloaded

from OSLNV calmodule EEPROM if this is the
first time that OSLNV calmodule is placed on
the system (tester)

Module 5 - 31
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW

¾ OSL Cal Data Downloaded from OSLNV EEPROM

!>START
!>Block : OSLCal
•VNA cal downloads this data from OSLNV calmodule EEPROM to file in Cal directory: File Name OSLCAL__00000009
!>Board Number : 0
!>Channel : 1
!>ComplexFormat : MA
!>Frequency Step : 10000000
!>MUX Number : 0
Open Short Load
!>Number of Columns : 7
!>Number of Elements : 596
!>Slot : 0
!>Start Frequency : 50000000
!>Stop Frequency : 6000000000

!>BODY
Frequency 07 indicated ideal data Open MAG Open ANGLE Short MAG Shot ANGLE Load MAG Load ANGLE
50000000.0 07 0.995608 -10.084674 0.833162 170.155945 0.057318 14.800912
60000000.0 07 0.995696 -16.384335 0.834410 163.790375 0.054188 5.579350
70000000.0 07 0.996827 -22.046890 0.834474 157.968552 0.052379 -2.373492
80000000.0 07 0.996675 -27.385401 0.834440 152.514694 0.051052 -9.343213
90000000.0 07 0.998468 -32.537170 0.834259 147.280533 0.050102 -15.631890
100000000.0 07 0.996641 -37.502205 0.834562 142.150742 0.049381 -21.662430
110000000.0 07 0.996734 -42.384857 0.834685 137.312027 0.048977 -27.237108
120000000.0 07 0.996734 -47.080772 0.835360 132.434875 0.048521 -32.361420
130000000.0 07 0.995696 -51.820618 0.834993 127.716988 0.048219 -37.513191
140000000.0 07 0.994966 -56.489067 0.835237 122.982628 0.047963 -42.472733

Module 5 - 32
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

16
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ OSLNV eeprom data download (V characteristics data)

Then, Verify Std characteristic data is downloaded

from OSLNV calmodule EEPROM if this is the
first time that OSLNV calmodule is placed on
the system (tester)

Module 5 - 33
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ S1PList Cal Data Downloaded from OSLNV EEPROM
!>START
!>Block : S1PList
O S L N V
!>Board Number : 0
!>Channel : 1
!>ComplexFormat : MA
EEPROM
Verify
Noise
Short
Open

Load

!>Frequency Step : 10000000

!>MUX Number : 0
!>Number of Columns : 2
!>Number of Elements : 596
!>Slot : 0
!>Start Frequency : 50000000
!>Stop Frequency : 6000000000 switch
!>BODY
Frequency V MAG V ANGLE
Data taken at plane 1
50000000.0 0.169563 169.302658
60000000.0 0.172019 162.750854
70000000.0 0.173530 156.790665
80000000.0 0.174515 151.208481
90000000.0 0.175309 145.648193
100000000.0 0.175935 140.328949 •VNA cal downloads data from OSLNV EEPROM to file in Cal directory: File Name S1PLISTL__00000009

110000000.0 0.175965 135.305527 *Verification is 11-20 dB

offset load
Module 5 - 34
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

17
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ OSL Raw Measurement Standard being measured

Once characteristic data is downloaded from EEPROM

Raw VNA measurement starts …

Microwave Dib-slot numbers

Calmodule Type
Measurement Type
Frequency of measurement

Message window

Module 5 - 35
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ System Noise Figure Calibration

For NF Calibration, it is recommended to let the

Noise Source warm up for 10-15 minutes before
proceeding by clicking on the Confirm button

Module 5 - 36
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

18
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ OSLNV EEPROM data download (ENR characteristic data)

Noise Source characteristic data (ENR, Gamma

Cold, Gamma Hot) is downloaded
from OSLNV calmodule EEPROM if this is the
first time that OSLNV calmodule is placed on
the system (tester) for NF calibration

Module 5 - 37
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: ENR Data for OSLNV Noise Source

Downloaded from EEPROM
• Program downloads characteristic data from EEPROM to file in Cal directory: File Name ENR__00000008
START
Block : ENR
O S L N V
Board Number : 0
Teradyne moves cal
Validate

Channel : 5
plane to plane 1.
Noise
Short
Open

Load

EEPROM

ComplexFormat : MA
Micronetics, the vendor
Frequency Step : 10000000
for the NS gives ENR
MUX Number : 0
Γcold and Γhot at cal
Number of Columns : 7
plane 0.
Number of Elements : 596
Slot : 0
Start Frequency : 50000000
Stop Frequency : 6000000000 switch
Data taken at plane 1
BODY
Frequency ENR for NS Γ Cold MAG Γ Cold ANGLE Γ Hot MAG Γ Hot ANGLE Loss by NS cable inside cal module

50000000 21.42 0.035745 -124.59 0.044633 -137.25 0.815 0.818

60000000 21.44 0.031559 -130.50 0.040863 -143.33 0.815 0.819
70000000 21.55 0.029161 -136.11 0.038927 -148.66 0.815 0.818
80000000 21.54 0.027029 -140.89 0.037242 -153.00 0.816 0.819
90000000 21.58 0.025573 -145.29 0.036014 -156.71 0.815 0.818
100000000 21.58 0.024454 -149.11 0.035130 -159.93 0.816 0.818
110000000 21.58 0.023596 -152.67 0.034484 -162.85 0.816 0.818
120000000 21.59 0.022919 -155.87 0.033937 -165.48 0.817 0.819
130000000 21.62 0.022524 -158.82 0.033701 -167.74 0.817 0.818
140000000 21.59 0.022065 -161.50 0.033342 -169.87 0.817 0.818
150000000 21.57 0.021692 -163.98 0.033069 -171.80 0.817 0.818
160000000 21.66 0.021400 -166.32 0.032825 -173.53 0.818 0.818

Module 5 - 38
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

19
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Noise Hot/Cold Measurements (step 8) Standard being measured

Microwave DIB slot numbers

Calmodule Type

Measurement Type

Frequency of measurement

Module 5 - 39
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Noise Hot/Cold Measurements

Another Frequency of measurement

Module 5 - 40
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

20
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Mounting THRU Calmodule (step 1)

When measurements with OSLNV

are completed, operator is
prompted to Accept them and then
Dismount OSLNV module

Module 5 - 41
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Mounting THRU Calmodule (step 2)

Then THRU calmodule must be

mounted on CalDIB and
connected to connector with gray
Ribbon cable.

Then calibration proceeds by

clicking the Go Button

Module 5 - 42
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

21
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ THRU EEPROM data download (thru
(thru’’s characteristics data)

THRU module sparameters characteristic data

(S11, S12, S22) is downloaded from EEPROM if
this is the first time that THRU calmodule is
placed on the system (tester)

Module 5 - 43
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: S2PR CAL DATA Downloaded from

EEPROM
• Program downloads S2PR sparameters data from EEPROM to file in Cal directory: File Name S2PR__00000008
THRU
!>START
!>Block : S2PR
!>Board Number : 0
THRU module data
EEPROM

!>Channel : 5
!>ComplexFormat : MA downloaded from
!>Frequency Step : 10000000 EEPROM
!>MUX Number : 0
!>Number of Columns : 6
!>Number of Elements : 596
!>Slot : 0
!>Start Frequency : 50000000
!>Stop Frequency : 6000000000

!>BODY
Frequency S11 Mag S11 Phase S12 Mag S12 Phase S22 Mag S22 Phase
50000000.0 0.003976 90.638214 0.998260 -7.885782 0.006291 28.745216
60000000.0 0.004490 84.662910 0.997795 -9.433106 0.007099 30.918056
70000000.0 0.005019 78.983894 0.997603 -11.018841 0.008424 37.710922
80000000.0 0.005488 74.654678 0.997586 -12.566166 0.008248 38.374844
90000000.0 0.006074 70.243156 0.996815 -14.135438 0.006780 35.433830
100000000.0 0.006640 66.561401 0.997296 -15.704712 0.008493 14.638223
110000000.0 0.007166 63.351524 0.996940 -17.246550 0.011380 23.713667
120000000.0 0.007574 60.394047 0.996888 -18.810335 0.012559 34.753445
130000000.0 0.008077 57.683487 0.996634 -20.368633 0.009595 43.900223
140000000.0 0.008588 54.671139 0.996799 -21.921444 0.007304 21.008589

Module 5 - 44
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

22
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Dismounting THRU module

Module 5 - 45
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Validating Calibrations and Storing Calibration Files

At the end of calibration, calfiles

are generated in

C:\Program Files\Teradyne\IG-XL
\Cal\MWBoard-4

Even though the files exist at this

point, they must be registered
with CalService Database by
clicking the Store button

Then CalDIB can be unlocked and

removed from test head

Module 5 - 46
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

23
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ CalFiles Persistence

The GUI asks you to store file.

The system creates cal packets, which assign a special header for each cal file. You
cannot replace cal files, as this header is associated with the cal file and is part of a
DATA BASE cal services routine creation of cal information with stamped time, date,
cal type, and freq. band information along with cal data.

REMEMBER: You CANNOT just erase or overwrite or rename cal data, due to this cal
database system.

Module 5 - 47
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ End of Calibration

Then Select File>Exit to close CalDIB GUI and CalDIB

program

Module 5 - 48
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

24
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Typical MW FLEX Calibrated NF data

DV2 Rx NF Cal Data 061104

8.2

7.8 Ch 5
NF (dB)

Ch 6
7.6
Ch 7
7.4 Ch 8

7.2

7
1.00E+09 1.10E+09 1.20E+09 1.30E+09
Freq (MHz)

Module 5 - 49
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ Typical MW FLEX Calibrated ENR data

DVBob ENR 1400~1990MHz (OSL#3) 082504

22

21.5

21
3osp3
ENR (dB)

20.5
3osp4
20 3osp1
3osp2
19.5

19

18.5
1.40E+09 1.55E+09 1.70E+09 1.85E+09
Freq (MHz)

Module 5 - 50
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

25
 Module 5: Noise Figure Cal File
•MWBoard_MWNoiseFigureCal__700_990_MHz_2_120104_190911

START
Block : NF
Cal_Date : Wed Dec 01 19:08:57 2004
Channel : 2.rf5
ComplexFormat : MA
Label : NF_Label

BODY

Freq. NF system reflection coef. of system (mag,phase) check value

700000000 7.378 0.049 151.807 1295.686
710000000 7.286 0.051 134.612 1262.291
720000000 7.231 0.050 119.551 1242.919
730000000 7.375 0.049 106.403 1294.442
740000000 7.386 0.046 90.710 1298.431
750000000 7.415 0.043 77.404 1309.101
760000000 7.452 0.040 59.442 1322.971
770000000 7.466 0.035 44.564 1327.964
780000000 7.418 0.032 22.020 1310.368
790000000 7.283 0.028 -2.178 1261.348
800000000 7.310 0.026 -30.410 1270.939
810000000 7.298 0.024 -60.192 1266.594
820000000 7.257 0.025 -92.113 1252.201

Module 5 - 51
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: ENR Cal File

•MWBoard_MWENRCal__700_990_MHz_2_120104_190911

START
Block : ENR
Cal_Date : Wed Dec 01 19:15:05 2004
Channel : 2.rf3
ENR for noise source inside port module – this is what
ComplexFormat : MA
software gets when it READS CAL factor for ENR when
Label : Enr_Label
using Y factor method

BODY
Freq. ENR(int. noise source) Γ cold MAG Γ cold Angle Γ hot MAG Γ hot Angle cable insertion loss (linear gain of cable-
700000000 21.40 0.063449 -143.83 0.044364 -132.98 0.995 0.995
check step
710000000 21.37 0.064614 -156.93 0.050123 -148.13 0.995 0.995
720000000 21.37 0.070797 -171.02 0.057609 -159.62 0.995 0.994
730000000 21.43 0.075294 175.93 0.063559 -170.96 0.994 0.994
740000000 21.41 0.078347 161.87 0.070932 174.06 0.994 0.994
750000000 21.47 0.080741 147.02 0.075708 159.99 0.994 0.994
760000000 21.63 0.083979 132.96 0.081122 145.44 0.994 0.994
770000000 21.68 0.085375 118.58 0.085621 130.81 0.994 0.994
780000000 21.53 0.087639 103.33 0.089501 114.81 0.994 0.994
790000000 21.42 0.090138 88.02 0.093342 99.11 0.994 0.994
800000000 21.40 0.093282 73.26 0.098690 82.70 0.994 0.994
810000000 21.35 0.091700 56.74 0.099897 66.97 0.994 0.995
820000000 21.32 0.091774 41.56 0.102003 50.22 0.995 0.995
830000000 21.39 0.091654 25.46 0.102321 33.10 0.995 0.995
840000000 21.22 0.089195 8.98 0.102271 15.89 0.996 0.996
850000000 21.09 0.086898 -7.77 0.100792 -1.06 0.996 0.996

Module 5 - 52
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

26
 Module 5: One-
One-Port VNA Cal File
•MWBoard_OnePortVNACal__700_990_MHz_2_120104_190911

MA means magnitude and angle format.

!>START RI means Real and Imaginary format.
!>Block : OSLCal
!>CalModuleSerialNumber : 000144E7
!>Channel : 2.rf1
!>ComplexFormat : MA
!>Date : 12/01/2004 20:13
!>Label : OSL_Data
!>MWBoardSerialNumber : 0001448A
!>Normalizing Impedance : 50.000000
Ideal data
!>Slot : 2
!>Unit : Hz
Raw data

!>BODY

# Hz S MA R 0.0
FREQ. Data type MAG ANGLE MAG ANGLE MAG ANGLE

700000000.0 07 0.953694 63.425957 0.791576 -128.603531 0.059796 125.300903

700000000.0 37 0.411475 -77.963043 0.481230 84.509811 0.100458 32.936836
710000000.0 07 0.961133 59.028248 0.791895 -132.946396 0.062176 117.843445
710000000.0 37 0.385078 -98.573807 0.500426 68.124344 0.089661 28.110859
720000000.0 07 0.965191 54.575710 0.791297 -137.338623 0.062875 111.323654

Module 5 - 53
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ MW CalDIB Future Options

- Parallel Calibration across multiple slots

- Mitigation of MW calibration total time
- Advanced Mode of operation for calibration FREQ step, FREQ ranges, CHANS
selection
- GUI/Windows improvements (maximize/minimize, automatic refreshing …)
- User instructions window with detailed steps of calibration operations

Module 5 - 54
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

27
 Module 5: MW CalDIB - SW
¾ MW CalDIB Future Options (cont’
(cont’d)

Module 5 - 55
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

28
M O D U L E 6

Module

6
Module 6 covers:

Additional material that is

optional for the course

Note: Module 6 content is subject to change.

 Module 6: Objectives

¾ On completion of this module the student should be

able to:

• Program the PTS 310 Synthesizer for use in microwave test.

Module 6 - 1
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ Module Objectives
™ PTS 310 Synthesizer
• Specs
• Programming
• Revisions

Module 6 - 2
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

1
 Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ Specs
• Can be used as a low-phase noise reference synthesizer for wireless devices

• 1—310 MHz frequency range

• 1—31 MHz in ultralow-phase noise mode
• Additional fixed 44 MHz output (+10 dBm, -145 dBc/Hz @ 10 kHz)

• Phase noise
(dBc/Hz)

100
1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz Noise floor
Hz
1-310 MHz -105 -115 -123 -127 -135
1-31 MHz -135 -140 -142 -145 -147

• Connected through GPIO

– DIB should provide 50 ohm load to meet specifications

Module 6 - 3
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ Specs (cont’
(cont’d)

– Output power

• max +13 dBm, calibrated down to +3 dBm

• Rated into 50 ohm load
• Below +3 dBm, accuracy is not specified

– Amplitude accuracy: ± 1.0 dB

– Departure from linear attenuation curve: ± 0.5 dB

Module 6 - 4
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002
* Optional exercise, if time permits

2
 Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ PTS 310 Programming

• VB modules used to support PTS310 control through GPIB

• Obtain through eKnowledge portal

• Two modules: GPIBWrappers, VBT_PTS310_Support

• Import into test program, along with NIGLOBAL and VBIB32, included
in the IG-XL inc directory

Module 6 - 5
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ VBT_PTS310_Support: pts310_frequency()

pts310_frequency(freq As Double, Optional prefer_low_phase_noise As Boolean = True,

Optional use_bandpass_filter As Boolean = False) As Long

– Freq is in Hz, prefer_low_phase noise will enable ultralow-phase noise mode if freq
<31 MHz

– Use_bandpass_filter will switch in filter if using ultralow-phase noise mode

Module 6 - 6
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

3
 Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ VBT_PTS310_Support: pts310_amp_dbm()

pts310_amp_dBm(dBm As Double) As Long

– Amplitude in dBm

• max +13, calibrated down to +3 dBm

• Rev B & C can go lower, but not with calibrated levels

– Calibrated at BNC on back of unit in support cabinet

– Does not compensate for test head cable loss, DIB loss, etc.
– Recommend a DIB loopback path to a VHFAC/BBAC instrument if
amplitude calibration or checker coverage needed

Module 6 - 7
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ VBT_PTS310_Support: pts310_attenuation()

pts310_attenuation(dB As Double) As Long

– Attenuation from max power (+13 dBm) in dB

– Same caveats as pts310_amplitude

Module 6 - 8
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

4
 Module 6: PTS 310 Synthesizer

¾ PTS310 Revisions

• Rev A PTS310 support only a 9 dB amplitude range, in 1 dB steps, without

bandpass filters
– Present in a few early shipments

• Rev B PTS310 added fine amplitude control

– Limited distribution

• Rev C
– This is the standard version
– Rev. B with added bandpass filters

• VBT_PTS310_Support version 4.1 and later should work with all three revisions
transparently

Module 6 - 9
PN 553-401-78 MRP Rev 002

5
A P P E N D I X A

Appendix

A
A.1 ZFL-1000LN Data Sheet

A.2 DIB Schematics

A P P E N D I X A . 1 : L M X 2 2 1 6 D A T A S H E E T

Appendix

A.1
ZFL-1000LN Data Sheet
A P P E N D I X A . 2 : L M X 2 2 1 6 B O A R D S C H E M A T I C

Appendix

A.2
DIB Schematics
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave Training DIB

VER 002
 FLEX/microFLEX Microwave Training DIB
(ver 002)

BBAC BNC
connections

Event trigger connection

Event
trigger
Additional
connections
(see BLOCK
diagram note
box for details)

3.osp1 4.osp1
OSP
connections

LAB DUTS
Demodulator, LNA, Modulator

VHFAC BNC
connections

VER 002
2
 BNC Connections for VHFAC and BBAC

VHFAC BBAC

S2 S1

BBAC
C2 C1
S1
S1 S2 C1 C2
S2
C1
VHFAC
C2
S1
S2
C1
C2

BNC Connections for VHFAC BNC Connections for BBAC

3
 FLEXmicroFLEX Training DIB
(ver 002) DUT Connects
LNA IN LNA Power LNA *note: these are rev002 DIB values,
(3.osp1) User Supply OUT(4.osp1)
Note: BBAC uses pin 2.xx
and VHFAC uses pin 22.xx
(for the modulator and
demodulator)

LO
LO LO_mod_in
LO_Demod_in (3.osp3)
(3.osp5) +15V GND

LNA MODULATOR
DEMODULATOR
ZFL1000LN
I I
ZAMIQ-895D ZAMIQ-895M
I_Mod_out_hi Q
Q_Mod_in_hi

2.b10 (BBAC Cap1+) 2.b2 (BBAC Src2+)

VHFAC
22.b10 (VHFAC C2-BNC) S1 S2 C1 22.b2(VHFAC S2-BNC)
C2 RF
RF
Demod_in RF mod_out
(4.osp4*) (4.osp3*)

VHFAC
S1
S2 Q
C1 I
C2 Q_Mod_out_hi
I_Mod_in_hi
2.a11 (BBAC Cap2+)
2.a3 (BBAC Src1+)
22.a11(VHFAC C1-BNC)
22.a3(VHFAC S1-BNC)
4
FLEX/microFLEX Microwave Training DIB
(ver 002) Interconnect Diagram
*note: these are rev002 DIB values,
which differ from rev001 DIB

Note: BBAC uses pin 2.xx

and VHFAC uses pin 22.xx
(for the modulator and
demodulator)

4.osp4*

4.osp3*

2.b10

2.a11

5
Flex/microFLEX Microwave Training DIB
(ver002) Block Diagram
*note: these are rev002 DIB values,
which differ from rev001 DIB

4.osp3*

2.b10

4.osp4*

Note: BBAC uses pin 2.xx

and VHFAC uses pin 22.xx
(for the modulator and
2.a11
demodulator)

6
LNA Power Connections

+15V
user
supply

GND

7
 Receiver_DIB_DUT_event_trigger
Physical Connect
Pin Name Pin
DIB_DUT_EVENT_TRIGGER C36

UW J4 c36

HSD 11.a29

8
Additional DIB Connections

Connection for 15V

Power supply when using
support board
J33-A19 to gnd

GND

J33 a19

9
Additional DIB Connections

GND

Connection for 15V Power

supply when using support
board
J20-A19 to gnd

J20 a19.

10
 FLEX/microFLEX Training DIB (Ver 002)
Parts List

FLEX Uwave Training Class DIB (ver 002) Parts

Parts Serial # Quantity

Stiffener TER#469-607-01D 1
OSP-SMA Snap-in TER#357-164-00 12
RF Plate TER#474-147-00 1
LNA-Minicircuits ZFL1000LN 1
Modulator-Minicircuits ZAMIQ-895M 1
Demodulator-Minicircuits ZAMIQ-895D 1
9" SMA cable-Tensolite 1-3632-620-5209 12
10"SMA cable-Tensolite 1-3637-620-5210 12
SMA F-F Bulkhead TER#359-267-04 12
Plate spacers TER#474-14800 2 (fiber glass spacer)
Plate screws 470-061-08 6
Proto Dib MX323 939-323-22 1
DIB Screws 470-061-05 30
washers (clear plastic) 471-061-01 6
Adds-in (optional)
GPIO Plate (fiber glass) 469-972-00 2
OSP extractor tool 480-471-00 1

11
A P P E N D I X B

Appendix

B
B. MICROWAVE Specification
Document (ESSD)
TERADYNE

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION SUPPORT DOCUMENT

FLEX PRODUCT GROUP

MICROWAVE VECTOR NETWORK ANAYZER

ESSD STATUS: FINAL

AUTHOR: Chris Albert

CURRENT VERSION NUMBER: 11/9/2005

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 1 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
Document Revision History:

3/11/01 Created from Gen 3 MWVNA ESSD KC

6/24/02 Added "PRELIMINARY" designation to individual pages. CTA
9/10/02 Updated source and receive level accuracy & dynamic range
specs. CTA
9/19/02 Updated section 8 to reflect changes in noise src. ENR. CTA
10/4/02 Changes to sections 4.6, 1.1.4.2, 3.3, & 8. CTA
10/11/02 Changes to section 2.4.2. CTA
10/22/02 Changes to section 7.5.2 CTA
10/23/02 Changes to sections 2.4.2 & 3.8.1 CTA
02/11/04 Changes to section 7 KC
02/11/04 Changes to sections 2.6 & 3.7 CTA
03/23/04 Changes to section 7 KC
05/05/04 Added note describing receive low level spurious CTA
07/23/04 Replaced TBD in section 3.3 and 3.4 CTA. Updated ModSrc
section. KC
07/30/04 Minor changes to notes affecting ModSrc sections. KC
09/08/04 Changes to section 4.0 CTA
09/13/04 Changes to section 3.9 & 3.10 CTA
12/2/04 Updated ModSrc CDMA and WCDMA sections. Minor cleanup
throughout. KC
12/13/04 Removed 2-port S-par. And Half-channel spec’s from section 5.
Made modulation freq. response spec’s in sect. 7.5 typical. KC
12/16/04 Added VNA spec’s up to 6GHz. KC
12/20/04 Minor renumbering and clarifications in sect. 7. KC
12/21/04 Minor clarifications to sect. 7. KC
12/22/04 Changed from Preliminary to Final status. KC
12/23/04 Fixed typos in sect. 5. KC
8/19/05 Incorporated results of LSD study conducted April-June 2005
throughout entire document.
8/29/05 Fixed typos and clarified notes. KC
8/31/05 Added temperature coefficients to sect. 2.6 and 7.4, added notes
42 and 43. Corrected note 7. KC
9/8/05 Updated sect. 2.4 to include derated harmonics for ModSrc CW
mode. KC
9/14/05 Changed limit in sect. 6.1, switching speed to 0.2dB.
9/28/05 Fixed formatting and note reference errors. KC
10/19/05 Merged MS6000 specifications, fixed formatting and note reference
errors. DLG
11/9/05 Added note 44, which refers to one-year validity of field calibration.
Applies to sections 2.6, 3.7 and 5.0 KC

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 2 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
NOTES:

• All specifications apply at the DIB "blind mate" RF connector, which is the
output of the instrument board, unless otherwise noted.

• All specifications assume a 50-ohm load.

• All specifications are guaranteed unless noted as TYPICAL or NOMINAL.

• TYPICAL specifications are sample tested, NOT 100% tested, and are NOT
guaranteed.

• NOMINAL specifications are generally calculated values, are NOT 100%

tested and are NOT guaranteed.

1. Source PA or Attenuator output path is automatically selected depending on

programmed source output power.

2. Additional error of ±0.4 dB max when switching to or crossing frequency

boundaries at 180 MHz, 500 MHz, 700 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1400 MHz,
2000 MHz, 2800 MHz, 4000 MHz, and 5600 MHz.

3. Receiver Directional Input Path is available on all three-instrument RF

channels. On one instrument main channel, the LNA input path is
automatically selected instead of the directional path to improve receiver
noise performance for low-level signals.

4. Measure Module LNA On or Measure Module LNA Off path is automatically

selected depending on programmed receive input power.

5. Spurious performance is guaranteed for inputs from +20 dBm to -10 dBm and
-15 dBm to -60 dBm for the input frequencies from 50 MHz to 2.5 GHz, and
for inputs from +20 dBm to -10 dBm and -15 dBm to -55 dBm (this assumes
that the Port LNA path is used for levels ≤ -15 dBm, but the directional path is
used for levels ≥ -15 dBm) from 2.5 GHz to 6 GHz. For RF input levels
between -10 dBm and -15 dBm and below -60 dBm and -55 dBm in their
respective bands, certain Local Oscillator dependent spurs can occur in the IF
band higher than -60 dBc; they are at a fixed level at the mixer output but will
vary in magnitude with IF gain. As the RF input is decreased below -60 dBm
below 2.5 GHz, for example, the IF gain is increased to keep the IF output at
+1 dBm and the dBc ratio of signal to spur decreases dB for dB with decrease
in input signal. The same degradation occurs between -10 dBm and -15 dBm.
These spurs are a function of the LO only, are normally observed (but not
restricted to) around 750 kHz, and can be calibrated out of a measurement by
observing the IF output without an RF input.

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 3 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
6. Leakage is specified relative to input signal at programmed level of -25 dBm.
LO-IF leakage is dependent on the programmed level and RF frequency. As
the programmed level increases and RF frequency goes up, leakage
performance improves.

7. S-Parameter specifications are valid for a user-performed external calibration

at the instrument board output plane using the Teradyne automated CAL DIB
fixture.

8. (note reserved for future use)

9. Settling is increased to 0.1 dB at 200 ms when crossing frequency boundaries

at180 MHz, 500 MHz, 700 MHz, 1000 MHz, 1400 MHz, 2000 MHz,
2800 MHz, 4000 MHz, and 5600 MHz.

10. Section 7 applies only to the modulation path when the optional Microwave
Modulation Source ModSource2700 or ModSource6000 assemblies are
present. Both the ModSource2700 and ModSource6000 assemblies provide
modulation in the 50 MHz to 2700 MHz frequency range, while only the
ModSource6000 assembly provides additional modulation capability in the 4
GHz to 6 GHz frequency range. Both assemblies require the use of an
arbitrary modulator (such as the BBAC source or VHFAC source) as the
fundamental modulated signal source. The BBAC and VHFAC sources are
both supported in the 50 MHz to 2700 MHz output carrier frequency range
(ModSource2700 and ModSource6000), while only the VHFAC source is
supported in the 4 GHz to 6 GHz output carrier frequency range
(ModSource6000 only). IF input path selections are valid only for cases
consistent with the frequency range of the modulator (2 MHz and 12 MHz for
BBAC, 2 MHz, 12 MHz, and 52 MHz for VHFAC).

11. Analog modulation types tested at output carrier frequencies of 50, 90, 110,
150, 200, 400, 850, 1900, and 2700 MHz at an output carrier power level of 0
dBm unless otherwise specified.

12. Digital modulation types are tested for output carrier frequencies of 50 MHz,
90 MHz, 110 MHz, 150 MHz, 200 MHz, 400 MHz, 850 MHz, 1900 MHz, and
2700 MHz, and 4000 MHz to 6000 MHz in 250 MHz steps at an output level
of 0 dBm, unless otherwise specified. Output carrier frequencies between 4
GHz and 6 GHz are supported only by the ModSource6000. Results are
calculated by averaging the results from 10 bursts of 256 symbols, unless
otherwise specified.

13. IS-95 CDMA Standard specifications are measured with QPSK modulation at
1.2288MHz symbol rate using root cosine filtering. ACP results are measured
for offset >850kHz in 30kHz bandwidth.

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 4 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
14. WCDMA standard specifications are measured with QPSK modulation at 3.84
MHz symbol rate using root cosine filtering.

15. Output value of noise source is determined during field noise source
calibration.

16. Performance may depend on digitizer selection.

17. Performance may depend on digitizer selection.

18. (Deleted)

19. For carrier frequencies 1 GHz to 2 GHz, spurs located at 1175 MHz,
1225 MHz, 1275 MHz, 1325 MHz, 1375 MHz, 1425 MHz, 1475 MHz, 1525
MHz, 1575 MHz, and 1625 MHz may be as high as -58 dBc.

20. OFDM standard specifications are measured with 64 QAM modulation at 54

Mbps per 802.11g standard in 50-2700 MHz output carrier frequency range or
per 802.11a standard in 4000-6000 MHz output carrier frequency range (18
MHz modulation bandwidth). Specifications are tested at 2400 MHz, 2450
MHz, 2500 MHz, and 5150 MHz to 5850 MHz in 100 MHz steps, and results
are calculated by averaging the results from 20 bursts. Output carrier
frequencies between 4 GHz and 6 GHz are supported only by the
ModSource6000. Spectral mask specifications are a measure of the ratio of
the total channel power in the modulation bandwidth to the power level
measured in the spectral mask offset region, normalized to 18 MHz
bandwidth, and relative to the exact IF input frequency of 52 MHz.

21. FM and PM parameters determined by waveform resolution, bandwidth and

sampling criteria of arbitrary modulator.

22. Discrete spurious signals (interference) may be present at levels below -

100 dBm. For measurements at frequencies where these spurs occur, level
accuracy will be compromised. For measurement frequencies that coincide
with a low level spur frequency, the effect of the spur can generally be
eliminated by adding a 10 kHz offset to the measurement frequency.

23. IF amplitude flatness does not include variation caused by digitizer anti-
aliasing filter. The FLEX Microwave on-board digitizer anti-aliasing filter
contributes additional variation of +0.5 dB/-2 dB 1 MHz to 36 MHz and +0.5
dB/-3 dB 1 MHz to 40 MHz.

24. Delay distortion does not include delay distortion caused by digitizer anti-
aliasing filter. The FLEX Microwave on-board digitizer anti-aliasing filter
contributes additional delay distortion of 0.5 ns from 1 MHz to 8 MHz, 20 ns
from 1 MHz to 32 MHz, and 70 ns 1 MHz to 40 MHz.
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 5 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
25. Tested at output carrier frequencies from 1850 MHz to 1945 MHz in 5 MHz
steps and 4000 MHz to 4700 MHz in 100 MHz steps. Output carrier
frequencies between 4 GHz and 6 GHz are supported only by the
ModSource6000. Measurements are calculated by averaging the results from
10 bursts of 424 symbols using 4 data points per symbol.

26. Use of 10MHz IF filter is recommended for frequencies below 60MHz when
measuring power levels < -20dBm.

27. Additional Error of ±0.4 dB maximum when switching to or crossing

modulation output carrier frequency boundaries at 50 MHz, 500 MHz, 1948
MHz, 2000 MHz, 2700 MHz, 4000 MHz, 4748 MHz, and 6000 MHz. Output
carrier frequencies between 4 GHz and 6 GHz are supported only by the
ModSource6000.

28. Modulation level accuracy is tested using sinusoidal waveforms at exact IF

center frequencies.

29. FM specifications tested using 1 kHz modulation frequency at 12 kHz and 25

kHz deviation, with results measured within 300 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth
using 75 µs de-emphasis.

30. PM specifications tested using 0.5 radian (10 kHz) peak deviation at 20 kHz
rate, with results measured within 300 Hz to 25 kHz bandwidth.

31. Phase settling time is tested when changing the output RF frequency by
varying the local oscillator frequency and/or IF filter path and does not include
the startup time of the AWG source.

32. (Deleted)

33. Restriction requires 5.5 MHz lowpass filter selected when using VHFAC AWG
source. For the BBAC AWG, the lowpass filter is fixed at 15 MHz.

34. Frequency response verified with VHFAC AWG source only.

35. Example: Amplifier, gain = 28 dB, NF = 1.1 dB, Input VSWR = 1.13.

36. Output power level calibrated by software automatic level control loop, which
produces an AWG sine wave at the user-defined IF frequency at a 400MHz
sample rate. Source level accuracy is valid when amplitude correction is
applied to the user's waveform for sample rates other than 400MHz to
compensate for sinc(Fin/Fs) attenuation, where Fin is the desired IF
frequency and Fs is the sample rate.

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 6 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
37. Spectral purity specifications are tested using a fundamental sinusoidal
waveform at an output power level of +10dBm.

38. AM specifications tested using 1kHz modulation frequency at 90% modulation

depth with results measured within 300Hz to 15kHz bandwidth.

39. Modulation mode level accuracy specification is typical above +10 dBm.

40. Applies to CW mode when Microwave Modulated Source is present.

41. EDGE measurements are calculated by averaging the results from 10 bursts
of 800 symbols using 8 data points per symbol.

42. Level accuracy valid upon activation of software “level: immediate” leveling
loop mode in user program.

43. Temperature drift applies to “level: auto” mode. Error is correctable upon
activation of “level: immediate” mode in user program.

44. Field calibration valid for one year.

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 7 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
1. Features

1.1 Ports
1.1.1 Number of RF Channels 3
1.1.2 Port Muxing
1.1.2.1 Main Channels 4:1
1.1.2.2 Half Channels (Third Channel Module) 3:1
1.1.3 Termination Unused ports terminated in
50 ohms
1.1.4 Maximum DC Ratings
1.1.4.1 Voltage ±60 V max.
1.1.4.2 Current
1.1.4.2.1 Main Chan. Mux Pos. 1&2 ±200 mA max.
1.1.4.2.2 Main Chan. Mux Pos. 3&4 ±50 mA max.
1.1.4.2.3 Half Channels ±200 mA max.

2. Source Direction

2.1 Frequency
2.1.1 Range 50 MHz - 6000 MHz
2.1.2 Resolution
2.1.2.1 50 MHz - 4000 MHz 2 Hz steps
2.1.2.2 4000 MHz - 6000 MHz 4 Hz steps

2.2 Level Range

2.2.1 Main Channels
2.2.1.1 50 MHz - 3000 MHz +13 dBm to -100 dBm
2.2.1.2 3000 MHz - 6000 MHz +10 dBm to -100 dBm
2.2.2 Half Channels (Third Channel Module)
2.2.2.1 50 MHz - 6000 MHz +10 dBm to -30 dBm
2.2.3 Add Path Output, Main Channels
2.2.3.1 50 MHz - 6000 MHz -7 dBm to -100 dBm

2.3 Impedance (typical as seen by DUT)

2.3.1 Uncorrected Return Loss (PA path) 1
2.3.1.1 50 MHz - 2000 MHz 12.4dB typ.
2.3.1.2 2000 MHz - 3000 MHz 13.3dB typ.
2.3.1.3 3000 MHz - 6000 MHz 12.4dB typ.
2.3.2 Uncorrected Return Loss (Attn path) 1
2.3.2.1 50 MHz - 2000 MHz 14.5dB typ.
2.3.2.2 2000 MHz - 3000 MHz 13.3dB typ.
2.3.2.3 3000 MHz - 6000 MHz 12.4dB typ.
2.3.3 Uncorrected Return Loss (Half-channels)
2.3.3.1 50-4000MHz 11.5dB typ.
2.3.3.2 4000-6000MHz 8.5dB typ.

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 8 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
2.4 Spectral Purity
2.4.1 Harmonic
2.4.1.1 50 MHz - 4000 MHz < -22dBc
2.4.1.2 50MHz – 3000MHz, ModSrc CW 40 < -20dBc

2.4.1.3 4000MHz – 6000MHz < -25dBc

2.4.1.4 3000MHz – 6000MHz, ModSrc CW 40 < -23dBc
2.4.2 Non-Harmonic Spurious
2.4.2.1 50 Hz - 480 Hz offset from carrier
2.4.2.1.1 50 MHz - 180 MHz < -50dBc typ.
2.4.2.1.2 180 MHz - 250 MHz < -54dBc typ.
2.4.2.1.3 250 MHz - 1GHz < -54dBc typ.
2.4.2.1.4 1 GHz - 2 GHz < -48dBc typ.
2.4.2.1.5 2 GHz - 4 GHz < -42dBc typ.
2.4.2.1.6 4 GHz - 6 GHz < -36dBc typ.
2.4.2.2 480 Hz - 2.8 MHz offset from carrier
2.4.2.2.1 50 MHz - 180 MHz < -50dBc typ.
2.4.2.2.2 180 MHz - 250 MHz < -64dBc typ.
2.4.2.2.3 250 MHz - 1 GHz < -64dBc typ.
2.4.2.2.4 1 GHz - 2 GHz < -58dBc typ.
2.4.2.2.5 2 GHz - 4 GHz < -52dBc typ.
2.4.2.2.6 4 GHz - 6 GHz < -46dBc typ.
2.4.2.3 Greater than 2.8 MHz offset from carrier
2.4.2.3.1 50 MHz - 180 MHz < -60dBc typ.
2.4.2.3.2 180 MHz - 250 MHz < -60dBc typ.
2.4.2.3.3 250 MHz - 1 GHz < -69dBc typ.
2.4.2.3.4 1 GHz - 2 GHz < -63dBc typ.19
2.4.2.3.5 2 GHz - 4 GHz < -60dBc typ.
2.4.2.3.6 4 GHz - 6 GHz < -53dBc typ.
2.4.3 Subharmonics
2.4.3.1 50 MHz - 2000 MHz none
2.4.3.2 2000 MHz - 4000 MHz
2.4.3.2.1 ½ Fout < -48dBc
2.4.3.2.2 3/2 Fout < -48dBc
2.4.3.3 4000 MHz - 4250 MHz
2.4.3.3.1 ½ Fout < -43dBc
2.4.3.3.2 3/2 Fout < -43dBc
2.4.3.4 4250 MHz - 6000 MHz
2.4.3.4.1 ½ Fout < -48dBc
2.4.3.4.2 3/2 Fout < -48dBc

2.5 Intermodulation Summing (< -10 dBm in each Tone using add path)
2.5.1 50 MHz - 100 MHz < -50dBc
2.5.2 100 MHz - 1500 MHz < -55dBc
2.5.3 1500 MHz - 6000MHz < -50dBc
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 9 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
2.6 Source Level Accuracy 2, 42. 44
2.6.1 50MHz to 3GHz
2.6.1.1 Pout = +10dBm to +13dBm +/-0.6dB, +/-0.3dB typ.
2.6.1.2 Pout = -15dBm to +10dBm +/-0.5dB, +/-0.3dB typ.
2.6.1.3 Pout = -50 dBm to -15dBm +/-0.65dB, +/-0.3dB typ.
2.6.1.4 Pout = -70dBm to -50dBm +/-0.9dB, +/-0.4dB typ.
2.6.1.5 Pout = -100dBm to -70dBm +/-1.1dB, +/-0.5dB typ.
2.6.2 3GHz to 6GHz
2.6.2.1 Pout = -15dBm to +10dBm +/-0.6dB, +/-0.5dB typ.
2.6.2.2 Pout = -50dBm to -15dBm +/-0.75dB, +/-0.5dB typ.
2.6.2.3 Pout = -70dBm to -50dBm +/-1.0dB, +/-0.5dB typ.
2.6.2.4 Pout = -100dBm to -70dBm +/-1.1dB, +/-0.5dB typ.
2.6.5 Add Path Output, 50MHz to 3GHz
2.6.5.1 Pout= -60dBm to -10dBm ±0.7dB
2.6.5.2 Pout= -70dBm to -60dBm +/-0.8dB, +/-0.4dB typ.
2.6.5.3 Pout= -100dBm to -70dBm ±1.0dB (Typical)
2.6.6 Add Path Output, 3GHz to 6GHz
2.6.6.1 Pout= -60dBm to -10dBm ±0.8dB
2.6.6.2 Pout= -70dBm to -60dBm +/-0.9dB, +/-0.5dB typ.
2.6.6.3 Pout= -100dBm to -70dBm ±1.0dB (Typical)
2.6.7 Temperature sensitivity 43 0.05dB/Deg. C

2.7 SSB Phase Noise L(f), Typical at +10dBm output power

ESSD Output L(f)@10 kHz L(f)@ 20 kHz L(f) @100 kHz L(f) @10 MHz
No. Frequency Offset Offset Offset Offset
2.7.1 50 MHz - -122 dBc/Hz -124 dBc/Hz -125 dBc/Hz -140 dBc/Hz
250 MHz
2.7.2 250 MHz - -132 dBc/Hz -133 dBc/Hz -134 dBc/Hz -145 dBc/Hz
500 MHz
2.7.3 500 MHz - -127 dBc/Hz -129 dBc/Hz -130 dBc/Hz -145 dBc/Hz
1000 MHz
2.7.4 1000 MHz - -122 dBc/Hz -124 dBc/Hz -123 dBc/Hz -147 dBc/Hz
2000 MHz
2.7.5 2000 MHz - -116 dBc/Hz -118 dBc/Hz -118 dBc/Hz -138 dBc/Hz
4000 MHz
2.7.6 4000 MHz - -110 dBc/Hz -112 dBc/Hz -113 dBc/Hz -134 dBc/Hz
6000 MHz

3. Receive Direction

3.1 Input Frequency

3.1.1 Range 50 MHz - 6000 MHz
3.1.2 Frequency Resolution (LO)
3.1.2.1 50 MHz - 4000 MHz 2 Hz
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 10 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
3.1.2.2 4000 MHz - 6000 MHz 4 Hz

3.2 Input Power Level

3.2.1 Directional Mode 3 +20 dBm max.
3.2.2 LNA Path On 3 -15 dBm max.
3.2.3 Damage Level
3.2.3.1 Directional Mode 3 +23 dBm or 15 dB
above programmed level
whichever is smaller.
3.2.3.2 LNA Path On 3 0 dBm or 15 dB above
programmed level whichever is
smaller.

3.3 IF Output
3.3.1 IF Bandwidth 100 kHz - 40 MHz max
3.3.2 IF Amplitude Response
3.3.2.1 40 MHz IF Filter Response (Typical) 23
3.3.2.1.1 1 MHz - 10 MHz ±0.2dB max.
3.3.2.1.2 1 MHz - 20 MHz ±0.4dB max.
3.3.2.1.3 1 MHz - 32 MHz ±1.0dB max.
3.3.2.1.4 1 MHz - 40 MHz ±2.0dB max.
3.3.2.2 10 MHz IF Filter Response (Typical) 23
3.3.2.2.1 1 MHz - 4 MHz ±0.2dB max.
3.3.2.2.2 1 MHz - 8 MHz ±0.5dB max.
3.3.2.2.3 1 MHz - 10 MHz ±1.0dB max
3.3.2.3 1 MHz IF Filter Response (Typical)
3.3.2.3.1 100 kHz - 900 kHz -2.3dB
3.3.2.3.2 100 kHz - 1 MHz -3.0dB
3.3.2.4 Attenuation at 1.8 MHz >43.0dB
3.3.2.5 Attenuation at 2.7 MHz >60.0dB
24
3.3.3 IF Delay Distortion (Typical)
3.3.3.1 1 MHz - 8 MHz, 10 MHz IF Filter <40 ns
3.3.3.2 1 MHz - 5 MHz, 40 MHz IF Filter <2 ns
3.3.3.3 1 MHz - 32 MHz, 40 MHz IF Filter <30 ns

3.4 Receiver Input Intercept Performance

3.4.1 Third Order Input Intercept 16
3.4.1.1 Directional Mode, Measure Module LNA Off 4
3.4.1.1.1 50 MHz - 600 MHz >+24dBm
3.4.1.1.2 600 MHz - 6 GHz >+30dBm
3.4.1.2 Directional Mode, Measure Module LNA On 4
3.4.1.2.1 50 MHz - 600 MHz >+14dBm
3.4.1.2.2 600 MHz - 6 GHz >+18dBm
3.4.1.3 Measure Module LNA Off & Port Module LNA On 4
3.4.1.3.1 50 MHz - 600 MHz >-7.5dBm
3.4.1.3.2 600 MHz - 6 GHz >-7.5dBm
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 11 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
3.4.1.4 Measure Module LNA On & Port Module LNA On 4
3.4.1.4.1 50 MHz - 600 MHz >-20dBm
3.4.1.4.2 600MHz - 6GHz >-16dBm
16
3.4.2 Second Order Input Intercept
3.4.2.1 Measure Module & Port Module LNA Off 4
3.4.2.1.1 50 MHz - 600 MHz >+38dBm
3.4.2.1.2 600 MHz - 6 GHz >+42dBm
3.4.2.2 Measure Module LNA On & Port Module LNA Off 4
3.4.2.2.1 50 MHz - 600 MHz >+25dBm
3.4.2.2.2 600 MHz - 6 GHz >+29dBm
3.4.2.3 Measure Module LNA Off & Port Module LNA On 4
3.4.2.3.1 50 MHz - 6 GHz >6dBm
3.4.2.4 Measure Module LNA On & Port Module LNA On 4
3.4.2.4.1 50 MHz - 6000 GHz >-7dBm

3.5 Receiver Input Return Loss

3.5.1 Directional Mode 3
3.5.1.1 50 MHz - 800 MHz 11dB typ.
3.5.1.2 800 MHz - 2100 MHz 14dB typ.
3.5.1.3 2100 MHz - 6000 MHz 11dB typ.
3.5.2 LNA Path On 3
3.5.2.1 50 MHz - 800 MHz 10dB typ.
3.5.2.2 800 MHz - 6000 MHz 12dB typ.
3.5.3 Half-Channels (Third Channel Module) 10dB typ.

3.6 Receiver Noise Figure (specified 10 MHz away from the carrier) 17
3.6.1 Measure Module & Port Module LNA Off 4
3.6.1.1 50 MHz - 3000 MHz , Main Channels 51dB, 41dB Typical
3.6.1.2 3000 MHz - 6 GHz, Main Channels 54dB, 45dB Typical
3.6.1.3 50 MHz - 3000 MHz, Half Channels 53dB, 41dB Typical
3.6.1.4 3000 MHz - 6 GHz, Half Channels 58dB, 45dB Typical
3.6.2 Measure Module LNA On & Port Module LNA Off 4
3.6.2.1 50 MHz - 3000 MHz, Main Channels 42dB, 34dB Typical
3.6.2.2 3000 MHz - 6 GHz, Main Channels 48dB, 38dB Typical
3.6.2.3 50MHz – 3000MHz, Half Channels 48dB Typical
3.6.2.4 3000MHz – 6 GHz, Half Channels 51dB Typical
3.6.3 Measure Module LNA Off & Port Module LNA On 4
3.6.3.1 50 MHz - 3000 MHz 23dB, 20dB Typical
3.6.3.2 3000 MHz - 6 GHz 23dB, 20dB Typical
3.6.4 Measure Module LNA On & Port Module LNA On 4
3.6.4.1 50 MHz - 200 MHz 20dB, 17dB Typical
3.6.4.2 200 MHz - 400 MHz 17dB, 14dB Typical
3.6.4.3 400 MHz - 6 GHz 17dB, 14dB Typical

3.7 Receive Level Accuracy44

3.7.1 50 MHz - 5000 MHz
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 12 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
3.7.1.1 +20 dBm to -50 dBm ±0.6dB
3.7.1.2 -15 dBm to -70 dBm ±0.6dB (Port LNA Path Only 3)
3.7.1.3 -70 dBm to -100 dBm ±1.0dB (Port LNA Path Only 3)
3.7.1.4 -100 dBm to -110 dBm 22 ±2.0dB (Port LNA Path Only 3)
3.7.2 5000 MHz - 6000 MHz
3.7.2.1 +20 dBm to -50 dBm ±0.7dB
3.7.2.2 -15 dBm to -70 dBm ±0.7dB (Port LNA Path Only 3)
3.7.2.3 -70 dBm to -100 dBm ±1.0dB (Port LNA Path Only 3)
3.7.2.4 -100 dBm to -110 dBm 22 ±2.0dB (Port LNA Path Only 3)

3.8 Receive Spurious 5

3.8.1 50 Hz - 480 Hz offset from carrier
3.8.1.1 50 MHz - 180 MHz < -50dBc typ.
3.8.1.2 180 MHz - 250 MHz < -50dBc typ.
3.8.1.3 250 MHz - 1 GHz < -50dBc typ.
3.8.1.4 1 GHz - 2 GHz < -48dBc typ.
3.8.1.5 2 GHz - 4 GHz < -42dBc typ.
3.8.1.6 4 GHz - 6 GHz < -36dBc typ.
3.8.2 480 Hz - 2.8 MHz offset from carrier
3.8.2.1 50 MHz - 180 MHz < -50dBc typ.
3.8.2.2 180 MHz - 250 MHz < -64dBc typ.
3.8.2.3 250 MHz - 1 GHz < -64dBc typ.
3.8.2.4 1 GHz - 2 GHz < -58dBc typ.
3.8.2.5 2 GHz - 4 GHz < -52dBc typ.
3.8.2.6 4 GHz - 6 GHz < -46dBc typ.
3.8.3 Greater than 2.8 MHz offset from carrier
3.8.3.1 50 MHz - 180 MHz < -60dBc typ.
3.8.3.2 180 MHz - 250 MHz < -60dBc typ.
3.8.3.3 250 MHz - 1 GHz < -69dBc typ.
3.8.3.4 1 GHz - 2 GHz < -63dBc typ.
3.8.3.5 2 GHz - 4 GHz < -60dBc typ.
3.8.3.6 4 GHz - 6 GHz < -53dBc typ.

3.9 LO-IF Leakage, -25 dBm Input Power, Directional Path 6

3.9.1 100 MHz - 6000 MHz <-70dBc typ. 26

3.10 RF-IF Leakage

3.10.1 50 MHz - 6000 MHz <-70dBc typ.

4. Phase Detector Option

4.1 Receiver Input Frequency 50 MHz - 6000 MHz

4.2 Measurement Range 1 kHz - 3 MHz Offset
4.3 Uncertainty
4.3.1 1 kHz - 8 kHz Offset ±4dB
4.3.2 8 kHz - 100 kHz Offset ±2dB
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 13 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
4.3.3 100 kHz - 3 MHz Offset ±3dB

4.4 Input Power Range

4.4.1 With noise floor as per item 4.6
4.4.1.1 Directional Path 3 +20dBm - 0dBm
4.4.1.2 Port LNA On 3 -20dBm to -30dBm
4.4.2 With derated noise floor +20dBm to -60dBm

4.5 Typical Noise Floor [dBc/Hz]

ESSD Input RF Offset
No. Freq. L(f) L(f) L(f) L(f) L(f) L(f) L(f) L(f)
@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
1 2 4 8 10 20 100 1
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz MHz
4.5.1 50 MHz – <-80 <-90 -100 -110 -110 -115 -125 -130
250 MHz
4.5.2 250 MHz - <-80 <-90 -100 -110 -110 -115 -130 -130
500 MHz
4.5.3 500 MHz - <-80 <-90 -100 -110 -110 -115 -130 -130
1000 MHz
4.5.4 1000 MHz – <-80 <-90 -100 -110 -110 -115 -123 -123
2000 MHz
4.5.5 2000 MHz - <-80 <-90 -100 -110 -110 -115 -118 -118
4000 MHz
4.5.6 4000 MHz - <-80 <-90 -100 -110 -110 -112 -113 -113
6000 MHz

5. Network Analysis44

5.1 Calibration, 50 MHz – 6 GHz

5.1.1 Automated Calibration DIB
5.1.1.1 Main Channels 1-Port, OSL Standards

5.2 S-parameter Corrected Residuals 7 50 MHz-2790 MHz

5.2.1 Main Channels
5.2.1.1 Corrected Directivity 40dB Typical
5.2.1.2 Corrected Source Match 35dB Typical
5.2.1.3 Reflection Tracking ±0.2dB Typical

5.3 S-parameter Corrected Residuals 7 2790 MHz-6000 MHz

5.3.1 Main Channels
5.3.1.1 Corrected Directivity 35dB Nominal
5.3.1.2 Corrected Source Match 30dB Nominal
5.3.1.3 Reflection Tracking ±0.5dB Nominal

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 14 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
6. Switching

6.1 Speed 2 ms - 0.2dB of final amplitude typ.9

7. Modulation (with optional Microwave Modulated Source capability) 10

7.1 Modulation Signal IF Input Restrictions

7.1.1 2 MHz IF Filter
7.1.1.1 IF Frequency Range 1.5 MHz - 2.5 MHz
7.1.1.2 Min. AWG Sample Rate 6.0 MHz + Input Frequency 33
7.1.2 12 MHz IF Filter
7.1.2.1 IF Frequency Range 11.25 MHz - 12.75 MHz
7.1.2.2 Min. AWG Sample Rate 52 MHz + Input Frequency
7.1.3 52 MHz IF Filter
7.1.3.1 IF Frequency Range 32 MHz - 72 MHz
7.1.3.2 Min. AWG Sample Rate 26 MHz + 3 x Input Frequency

7.2 Frequency
7.2.1 Carrier Frequency Range
7.2.1.1 IF Input = 1.5 MHz – 2 MHz 50 MHz - 2700 MHz,
4000 MHz – 6000 MHz
7.2.1.2 IF Input = 11.25 MHz-12 MHz 50 MHz - 2700 MHz,
4000 MHz – 6000 MHz
7.2.1.3 IF Input = 32 MHz-52 MHz 50 MHz - 2700 MHz,
4000 MHz – 6000 MHz
7.2.1.4 IF Input = 2 MHz – 2.5 MHz 50 MHz – (2700 MHz – IF Input
Freq.),
4000 MHz – (6000 MHz – IF
Input Freq.)
7.2.1.5 IF Input = 12 MHz – 12.75 MHz 50 MHz – (2700 MHz – IF Input
Freq.),
4000 MHz – (6000 MHz – IF
Input Freq.)
7.2.1.6 IF Input = 52 MHz – 72 MHz 50 MHz – (2700 MHz – IF Input
Freq.),
4000 MHz – (6000 MHz – IF
Input Freq.)
7.2.2 Resolution
7.2.2.1 50 MHz - 1948 MHz 4 Hz
7.2.2.2 1948 MHz - 2700 MHz 8 Hz
7.2.3 Phase Settling 80 µs max. - 1.0 radian typ. 31

7.3 RF Output Level

7.3.1 Level range (see section 2.2)
7.3.2 Level accuracy 27, 28, 36, 39 (see section 2.6)
7.3.3 Level temperature sensitivity 43
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 15 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
7.3.3.1 50 MHz - 2700 MHz -0.15dB/deg. C typ.
7.3.3.2 4000 MHz - 6000 MHz -0.03dB/deg. C typ.

7.4 Spectral Purity 37

7.4.1 Non-Harmonic Spurious
7.4.1.1 50 MHz - 1948 MHz < -48dBc typ.
7.4.1.2 1948 MHz - 2700 MHz < -42dBc typ.
7.4.1.3 4000 MHz - 4748 MHz < -48dBc typ.
7.4.1.4 4748 MHz - 6000 MHz < -42dBc typ.
7.4.2 Harmonic Spurious <-22dBc max., -25 dBc typ.

7.5 Modulation Frequency Response (relative to exact IF input frequency) 34

7.5.1 2 MHz IF Filter Path
7.5.1.1 0.5 dB Bandwidth 300 kHz typ.
7.5.1.2 1.0 dB Bandwidth 1.0 MHz typ.
7.5.1.3 Group Delay Variation 75 ns typ. over 300 kHz BW
7.5.2 12 MHz IF Filter Path
7.5.2.1 0.5 dB Bandwidth 1 MHz typ.
7.5.2.2 1.0 dB Bandwidth 1.5 MHz typ.
7.5.2.3 Group Delay Variation 25 ns typ. over 1 MHz BW
7.5.3 52 MHz IF Filter Path
7.5.3.1 1.0 dB Bandwidth 40 MHz typ.
7.5.3.2 Group Delay Variation 20 ns typ. over 40 MHz BW

7.6 Amplitude Modulation 11

7.6.1 IF Filter Path Selections 2 MHz, 12 MHz, 52 MHz
7.6.2 Output Level ≤0 dBm (carrier power level)
7.6.3 Modulation Depth 0-100%
7.6.4 Distortion + Noise 0.005% typ. for 90% AM 38
7.6.5 Output Carrier Frequency Range 50MHz to 2700MHz

7.7 Frequency Modulation 11

7.7.1 IF Filter Path Selections 2 MHz, 12 MHz, 52 MHz
7.7 2 Deviation Range (see note 21)
7.7.3 Deviation Accuracy (see note 21)
7.7.4 Distortion + Noise 0.1% max for 1 kHz mod 29
7.7.5 Output Carrier Frequency Range 50MHz to 2700MHz

7.8 Phase Modulation 11

7.8.1 IF Filter Path Selection 2 MHz, 12 MHz, 52 MHz
7.8.2 Deviation Error 2 deg (0.035 rad) typ. 30
7.8.3 Deviation Range (see note 21)
7.8.4 Deviation Accuracy (see note 21)
7.8.5 Output Carrier Frequency Range 50MHz to 2700MHz

7.9 GMSK/GSM (0.3-Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying, GSM Standard) 12

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 16 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
7.9.1 IF Filter Path Selection 2 MHz, 12 MHz, 52 MHz
7.9.2 Phase error
7.9.2.1 Fout = 50 MHz - 1948 MHz 0.5 deg. rms typ.
7.9.2.2 Fout = 1948 MHz - 2.7 GHz 0.8 deg. rms typ.
7.9.2.3 Fout = 4000 MHz - 4748 MHz 0.5 deg. rms typ.
7.9.2.4 Fout = 4748 MHz - 6000 MHz 0.8 deg. rms typ.

7.10 EDGE Standard 12, 41

7.10.1 IF Filter Path Selection 2 MHz, 12 MHz, 52 MHz
7.10.2 Error Vector Magnitude
7.10.2.1 Fout = 50MHz to 1948MHz 0.3% rms typ
7.10.2.2 Fout = 1948MHz to 2700MHz 0.4% rms typ
7.10.2.3 Fout = 4000 MHz - 4748 MHz 0.5% rms typ
7.10.2.4 Fout = 4748 MHz - 6000 MHz 0.7% rms typ

7.11 GFSK (0.5-Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying, DECT Standard) 12, 25

7.11.1 IF Filer Path Selections 52MHz
7.11.2 Output Frequency Range 1850MHz - 1948MHz,
4000 – 4748 MHz
7.11.3 Deviation Error 1.3% typ

7.12 IS-95 CDMA Standard 12, 13

7.12.1 IF Filter Path Selection 12 MHz, 52 MHz
7.12.2 Rho Factor 0.9997 typ.
7.12.3 Adjacent Channel Power
7.12.3.1 Fout = 50MHz to 1948MHz -65dBc typ
7.12.3.2 Fout = 1948MHz to 2700MHz -59dBc typ.
7.12.3.3 Fout = 4000MHz to 4748MHz -63dBc typ
7.12.3.4 Fout = 4748MHz to 6000MHz -59dBc typ.

7.13 Wideband CDMA Standard 12, 14

7.13.1 IF Filter Path Selections 52 MHz
7.13.2 Error Vector Magnitude
7.13.2.1 Fout = 50MHz to 1948MHz 1.2% rms typ.
7.13.2.2 Fout = 1948MHz to 2700MHz 1.6% rms typ.
7.13.2.3 Fout = 4000MHz to 4748MHz 1.3% rms typ.
7.13.2.4 Fout = 4748MHz to 6000MHz 1.6% rms typ.

7.14 OFDM Modulation 20

7.14.1 IF Filter Path Selection 52 MHz
7.14.2 Output Carrier Frequency Range 2400MHz to 2500MHz,
5150MHz to 5850MHz
7.14.3 Spectral Mask for 54MB/s (18MHz BW)
7.14.3.1 9 MHz from Fc -0.0dBc
7.14.3.2 11 MHz from Fc -20.0dBc
7.14.3.3 20 MHz from Fc -28.0dBc
FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 17 of 18
Rev. 11/9/05
Final
7.14.3.4 30MHz from Fc -40.0dBc
7.14.3.5 50MHz from Fc -40.0dBc
7.14.4 Error Vector Magnitude
7.14.4.1 Fout = 2400MHz to 2500MHz 1.3% rms typ.
7.14.4.2 Fout = 5150MHz to 5850MHz 1.4% rms typ.

8. Excess Noise Ratio (ENR) Source

8.1 RF Frequency Range 50MHz to 6000MHz

8.2 Excess Noise Ratio (ENR) Level 15
8.2.1 50 MHz - 3000 MHz 17.5dB - 25dB
8.2.2 3000 MHz - 6000 MHz 16.5dB - 26dB
8.3 Output Return Loss
8.3.1 50 MHz - 3000 MHz >12dB
8.3.2 3000 MHz - 6000 MHz >8dB
8.4 Noise Figure Measurement Accuracy
8.4.1 Frequency Range 700MHz to 2790MHz
8.4.2 Accuracy 0.42dB typ. 35

- End of Specification -

FLEX Microwave ESSD Page 18 of 18

Rev. 11/9/05
Final
A P P E N D I X C

Appendix

C
C. Transmission-Line Theory
 Agenda

Day 1
„ Differences between classical circuit theory and
electromagnetic fields theory

„ Transmission lines

„ Reflection coefficient and VSWR

MICROWAVE BASICS „ Smith’s chart

„ Exercises

Day 2
„ Scattering and transfer scattering matrices

„ Behaviour of lumped elements

„ Impedance matching

„ Power and S-parameters measurements

Pio Marcozzi
T Eric Jeanney
Annexes TERADYNE- RF BASIC 2
 DAY 1

„ Differences between classical

circuit theory and
electromagnetic fields theory

DAY 1
„ Transmission lines

„ Reflection coefficient and

VSWR

„ Smith’s chart

„ Exercises
TERADYNE- RF BASIC 3 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 4
 CLASSICAL CIRCUIT THEORY
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CLASSICAL CIRCUIT
THEORY AND TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY
WHEN dmax<λmin/20

MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS ⇒ Voltage and Current

4 Ghz
b

ba
V = − ∫ E ⋅ dl
2m a

10 cm I = ∫ H ⋅ dl
Demodulator
Magnetic flux variations are approximated by a lumped inductor
100 Mhz
Electric flux variations are approximated by a lumped capacitor

At 4 Ghz (r=1) we have 7,5 cm wavelength KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS

At 100 Mhz (r=1) we have 3 m wavelength. N

∑V n
=0
n =1
M
We can use voltages and currents for 100 Mhz path. ∑I m
=0
m =1

We must use transmission line theory for 4 Ghz path.

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 5 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 6

 CLASSICAL CIRCUIT THEORY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS

LIMITATIONS: transmission line size = λ PROPAGATION

20
Physical view
Frequency Constant εr Wavelength Classical theory Electric and magnetic fields traveling along a direction satisfy following
equation

E
30 Mhz 1 10 m 50 cm = Z0
H
30 Mhz 4 5m 25 cm
E
300 Mhz 1 1m 5 cm Forward traveling wave

Z ε μ
300 Mhz 4 0.5 m 2.5 cm H

3 Ghz 1 10 cm 0.5 cm Equations

v is propagation speed of the fields while the other one is the
characteristic impedance
3 Ghz 4 5 cm 0.25 cm

1 μ
v= Z0 =
εμ ε

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 7 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 8

 TRANSMISSION LINES SOLUTIONS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
GUIDED ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES TIME DOMAIN
Physical view. Wave equations (by math from telegrapher’s equations)
“Voltage” and “current” waves can be thought as electric and magnetic fields
amplitudes. In this way they can vary along the line ∂ 2V 1 ∂ 2V ∂ 2I 1 ∂ 2I
I − =0 − =0
∂z 2 v 2 ∂t 2 ∂z 2 v 2 ∂t 2
V
Solutions
z z
Z + jω ( t − )
− jω ( t + )
v + v
Equivalent distributed circuit: V =V e V e
z
ω −z jω ( t + )
As a mathematical representation of electromagnetic fields propagation take into 1 + j (t v ) v
account a very little piece of the transmission line (dz). The line is represented by a I= (V e − V −e )
series distributed inductor, distributed resistor and a shunt distributed capacitor, Z0
distributed conductor.
I L dz R dz I dz FREQUENCY DOMAIN
Wave equations (by math from telegrapher’s equations)
V G dz C dz V dz ∂ 2V ω 2 ∂ 2I ω 2
+ 2 V=0 + I=0
∂z 2 v ∂z 2 v 2
dz
Solutions
Telegrapher’s equations z z
− jω + jω
+ −
V =V e v +V e v
∂V ∂ ∂I ∂ − jω z + jω z
= −L I = −C V 1 + −
∂z ∂t ∂z ∂t I= (V e v − V e v )
Z0

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 9 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 10

 TRANSMISSION LINES ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
REFLECTION AND TRANSMISSION
PHYSICAL SOLUTIONS
Physical view

Transmission lines can support some physical waves that Electric and magnetic fields are partially reflected when passing from
medium 1 to medium 2
are called solutions of the telegrapher’s equations.
Solutions are given by forward voltage and current waves
Transmitted
+ backward voltage and current waves (Z 0 is Incident fields
fields
Ei
called “characteristic impedance” because it is the ratio
Et
between forward voltage and forward current. Z 0 is the
Hi
ratio between backward voltage and backward current too). ε1 μ1 Er Hr Ht
v is the propagation speed of the waves.
ε2 μ2
Reflected fields

V+ V-
Z0 Equations
V+/η V-/η
1 μ1
v1 = Z 01 =
ε1μ1 ε1
Z
0
Speed and characteristic impedance of the waves 1 μ2
v2 = Z 02 =
ε2 μ2 ε2
1 L
v= Z0 =
LC C

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 11 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 12

 REFLECTION COEFFICIENT
REFLECTION COEFFICIENT
Reflection coefficient Γ
REFERENCE SYSTEM
Γ is defined as the ratio between backward and forward voltage waves
Take into account a reference system where load impedance is at z −
= 0 and source is at z = -l V
Γ= +
V
From boundary condition we obtain Γ as a function of load impedance. We
z0 zL obtain load impedance as a function of Γ too

z L − z0 1+ Γ
Γ= z L = z0
-l 0 Z z L + z0 1− Γ
Let’s define ω (γ is called propagation constant)
γ= Reflection coefficient along the line ( z = - l)
v
Wave solutions can be rewritten as Γ can be calculated for each point of the line as ratio between backward and
+ − jγz − + jγz
forward voltage waves
V =V e +V e
− − γ
1 + − j γz V e jl − j 2 γl
I = (V e − V − e + jγ z ) Γ ( −l ) = + + γ = Γe
z0 V e jl
where z0 is the characteristic impedance
each λ/2 same impedance is seen: γ = ω/v = 2π/λ ⇒ λ/2 far away from the load
Boundary condition we have the same Γ ⇒ we have the same impedance.
|Γ| is constant along the transmission line
Ratio between V and I at z = 0 equals zL. Using wave solutions at z
= 0 we obtain Input impedance at z = - l
+ − z L cos γl + jz0 sin γl
V ( 0) V +V zin = z0
zL = = z0 + −
I (0) V −V z0 cos γl + jz L sin γl

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 13 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 14

 VOLTAGE STANDING WAVE RATIO SIMPLE EXAMPLES

Voltage along a line

+ − γ − + γ IDEAL SHORT
V =V e jz +V e jz
+ − jγ z + ϑ p V(0) = 0 ⇒ V- = -V+ reflected voltage is the opposite of incident one at the
V =V e + V Γ e j e jγz
load impedance position ⇒ Γ = -1 ⇒ VSWR = + ∞
I(z) V(z)
zin = jz0 tan γl z0

z IDEAL OPEN
λ /2 I(0) = 0 ⇒ V- = V+ reflected voltage is the same as the incident one at the
load impedance position ⇒ Γ = +1 ⇒ VSWR = + ∞
+ − + −
Vmax = V + V Vmin = V − V
Voltage standing wave ratio is defined as the ratio between Vmax and Vmin zin = − jz0 cot γl
z0
Vmax
VSWR =
Vmin IDEAL LOAD

Relationships between Voltage Standing Wave Ratio and reflection V(0)/I(0) = z0 ⇒ V- = 0 reflected voltage vanishes at the load impedance
coefficient position ⇒ Γ = 0 ⇒ VSWR = + 1

1+ Γ −
VSWR = Γ = VSWR 1 zin = z0
1− Γ VSWR + 1 z0 z0

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 15 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 16

 TRANSMISSION LINES EXAMPLES POWER ABSORPTION AND RETURN LOSS

Coaxial guide
η ⎛ r0 ⎞ z0
z0 = ln⎜ ⎟ zL
2π ⎜⎝ ri ⎟⎠
r0
π
ri γ =2
λ 0 Z
-l
1 + − γ − + γ
Rectangular waveguide
I = (V e j z − V e j z )
2 z0
⎛λ ⎞ + − jγz − + jγz
z0 = η 1 − ⎜ ⎟
⎝ 2a ⎠ V =V e +V e
b 2 Incident and reflected power
a π λ
γ = 2 1 − ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟
λ ⎝ 2a ⎠ Incident (forward) wave carries power. The same is done by reflected
(backward) wave
+ 2 − 2
V V
Microstrip line Pincident = Preflected =
z0 z0
Power transmitted to the load impedance
+ 2
V 2 2
Ptransmitted = Pincident − Preflected = 1 − Γ = Pincident 1 − Γ
( ) ( )
Strip line z0
Return loss definition

⎛ Preflected ⎞
RL = −10 log⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = −20 log Γ
⎝ Pincident ⎠
TERADYNE- RF BASIC 17 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 18
 SMITH TRANSMISSION-LINE CHART SMITH TRANSMISSION-LINE CHART

Z Chart for impedances

We can define normalized impedance with the following relations: z= = r + jx
Z0
We know that The reflection coefficient is complex:
1. Normalize load impedance by z0
Γ = u + jv
2. Individuate load impedance on Smith chart (graphical representation of
With z = 1
+ Γ we can find two equations by separate real and load impedance)
1− Γ
imaginary part: 3. Rotate clockwise if moving towards source or anti-clockwise if moving
2 2 towards load
⎛ − r ⎞ + 2= 1 2
⎜u ⎟ v And (u − 1) + ⎛⎜ v − 1 ⎞⎟ = 12
⎝ r + 1⎠ (1 + r )2 ⎝ x⎠ x 4. Remember that for each λ/2, angle rotation is 2π

These are circle equations. 5. Example: find on the Smith chart the impedance =50+j50
r =1
u 1 Upper half plane is inductive
1) Radius:
1+ r
x=1
r =3 ⎛ = r ⎞ x=2
Center: ⎜u ,v = 0⎟
⎝ r +1 ⎠
v x = 0.5

r = 0.5 r=1

u x =1 r=2
2) 1
Radius:
x =2 x x = -0.5

⎛ = 1⎞
Center: ⎜ u 1, v = ⎟ x = -2
v ⎝ x⎠ x = -1

Lower half plane is capacitive

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 19 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 20
 SMITH TRANSMISSION-LINE CHART
SMITH TRANSMISSION-LINE CHART
Position of some important loads

Chart for admittances 50 Ω

Open x=1
1. Normalize load admittance by g0 x=2
Short
2. Individuate load admittance on Smith chart (graphical representation of x = 0.5
load admittance)

3. Rotate clockwise if moving towards source or anti-clockwise if moving r = 0.5 r=1

towards load
r=2
4. Remember that for each λ/2, angle rotation is 2π

5. Example: find on the Smith chart the impedance =50 // j50. It is a shunt x = -0.5
resistor and shunt inductor. x = -2
x = -1

y = -1
y = -2
Rotation of reflection coefficient along a transmission line
θ=2γl

y = -0.5
zin
zL
zin
g = 0.5
zL
g=1
g=2

y = 0.5
θ

y=2
y=1

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 21 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 22

 EXERCISES EXERCISES
1) You have a 50 Ω transmission line loaded by an ideal resistor which 2) You have a 50 Ω transmission line loaded by an ideal
value is 200 Ω.
Speed of light inside transmission line is 2 108 m/s. Length of
resistor which value is 60 Ω.
transmission line is 10 cm. Speed of light inside transmission line is 2 10 8 m/s. Length
Calculate impedance seen at the input of the transmission line for of transmission line is 10 cm.
each one of the following frequencies: 10 Mhz, 100 Mhz, 500 Mhz, Calculate impedance seen at the input of the transmission
1Ghz, 1.5 Ghz, 2Ghz. line for each one of the following frequencies: 10 Mhz, 100
Mhz, 500 Mhz, 1Ghz, 1.5 Ghz, 2Ghz.
Solution
Solution
50 Ω 200 Ω

50 Ω 60 Ω
10 cm
ΓL= (200-50)/(200+50) = 3/5 = 0.6
10 cm
Γin=ΓLe-j2γ0.1
ΓL= (60-50)/(60+50) = 1/11 = 0.09
zin=z0(1+Γin)/(1-Γin)
Γin=ΓLe-j2γ0.1
frequency Γin input impedance
10 Mhz 0.598 - j 0.037 197 - j 23 zin=z0(1+Γin)/(1-Γin)

100 Mhz 0.485 - j 0.352 82.2 - j 91 frequency Γin input impedance

500 Mhz - 0.6 + j 0 12.5 + j 0 10 Mhz 0.09 - j 0.006 59.9 - j 0.6
1 Ghz 0.6 + j 0 200 + j 0
100 Mhz 0.073 - j 0.053 57.6 - j 6.2
1.5 Ghz - 0.6 + j 0 12.5 + j 0
500 Mhz - 0.09 + j 0 41.6 + j 0
2 Ghz 0.6 + j 0 200 + j 0
1 Ghz 0.09 + j 0 60 + j 0
1.5 Ghz - 0.09 + j 0 41.6 + j 0
2 Ghz 0.09 + j 0 60 + j 0
TERADYNE- RF BASIC 23 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 24
 EXERCISES
3) Find input impedance of a λ/8 short circuited stub. Use the Smith
chart
zin
Solution

50 Ω λ/8

λ/8
zL

zin is an ideal inductor with impedance j 50. DAY 2

4) Find input impedance of a λ/8 open stub

Solution

zL
50 Ω

λ/8 λ/8

zin is an ideal capacitor with impedance -j 50

zin

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 25 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 26

 SCATTERING MATRIX

DAY 2 Transmission lines are used to connect different parts of circuits.

Between two or more lines we can have discontinuities too

a1 z1 z2
z0 b2
b1 z3 a2 z0 zL

„ Scattering and transfer

scattering matrices Physical discontinuity is represented by a lumped equivalent circuit.

Lumped circuit can be T or Π form.

Waves a and b are obtained dividing “voltages” by square root of z0. In

„ Behaviour of lumped elements this way incident power is |a|2 while reflected one is |b|2.

Discontinuity examples

„ Impedance matching Right-angled q p q l l q’ p1/2 p’

corners or bends q’ p’ c c 1/2

„ Power and S-parameters

q l 1 l 2 q’
measurements Step width changes
w1 w2 c

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 27 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 28

 SCATTERING MATRIX SCATTERING MATRIX
Physical discontinuity can be represented by a 2 port network S Matrix
Some interesting results about passive lossles networks:
a1 a2 Port 2 is matched (a 2= 0)
Port 1 [S] Port 2 2 2 2
b1 b2 a1 − b1 = b2

⎡ b1 ⎤ ⎡ S11 S12 ⎤ ⎡ a1 ⎤ S21

⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ a1 b2
⎣b2 ⎦ ⎣ S 21 S 22 ⎦ ⎣ a 2 ⎦ S11
b1
b
S11 = 1
a1 a2 = 0
port 2 is matched 2 2
S 11 + S 21 =1
b
S12 = 1
a2 a1 = 0
port 1 is matched
Port 1 is matched (a 1= 0)
2 2 2
b b1 = a2 − b2
S22 = 2
a2 a1 = 0
port 1 is matched

b2 b2
S21 =
a1 port 2 is matched
a2 = 0 S22
b1 a2
Power handling ( lossless hypothesis) S12
2 2 2 2
a1 − b1 = b2 − a 2 2 2
S12 + S 22 =1
S 21
a1 b2
S11 S 22 If network is lossy then < sign holds in second and fourth equation of this
b1 a2 page.
S 12
TERADYNE- RF BASIC 29 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 30
 SCATTERING TRANSFER MATRIX LOAD IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMATION
Cascading two or more S matrices use this representation Impedances are affected by discontinuities.
T Matrix
a1
a1 a2 [S] zL
b1
[T]
b1 b2 Γ in
By definition Γin=b1/a1 and from math
⎡a1 ⎤ ⎡T11 T12 ⎤ ⎡ b2 ⎤ Γ
Γin = S11 + S12 S21 L
⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ 1 − S22ΓL
⎣ b1 ⎦ ⎣T21 T22 ⎦ ⎣a2 ⎦
As example, take into account a 50 Ω load impedance connected to port 2 of a
Cascade of two matrices discontinuity. Calculate impedance seen at the input port of the discontinuity.
a2 b3 Notice that you will not see anymore a 50 Ω load impedance
Let’s suppose that S-matrix is as following one (low pass filter)
a1 a4
[T1] [T2] Freq S11 S12 S21 S22
b1 b4 200 Mhz 0.20 ∠60º 0.80 ∠75º 0.80 ∠75º 0.20 ∠-60º
b2 a3 500 Mhz 0.20 ∠-135º 0.80 ∠122º 0.80 ∠122º 0.20 ∠-45º
1.5 Ghz 0.99 ∠-80º 0.10 ∠65º 0.10 ∠65º 0.99 ∠80º
⎡ a1 ⎤ ⎡ b4 ⎤ 2.0 Ghz 0.99 ∠-30º 0.10 ∠-40º 0.10 ∠-40º 0.99 ∠-150º
⎢ ⎥ = [T ]⎢ ⎥
⎣ b1 ⎦ ⎣ a4 ⎦ If ΓL is an ideal load (50 ohm all over the band) we have

[T ]= [T1 ]⋅ [T2 ] Freq 200 Mhz 500 Mhz 1.5 Ghz 2.0 Ghz
Γin 0.20 ∠60º 0.20 ∠-135º 0.99 ∠-80º 0.99 ∠-30º
Relationship between [S] and [T] matrix
Ret Loss 13.98 dB 13.98 dB 0.087 dB 0.087 dB
⎡1 Ideal Γin 0.00 ∠0º 0.00 ∠0º 0.00 ∠0º 0.00 ∠0º
Ideal RL + Inf + Inf + Inf + Inf
− S 22 ⎤⎥
⎡T11 T12 ⎤ ⎢ S 21 S 21 ⎥
⎢T T ⎥ = ⎢ S S S We would like to see a 50 Ω impedance at the input port of the discontinuity
⎣ 21 22 ⎦ ⎢ 11 S12 − 11 22 ⎥ ( ideal Γin = 0 , ideal RL = + ∞ ) but we don’t.
⎣⎢ S 21 S 21 ⎦⎥
TERADYNE- RF BASIC 31 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 32
 TWO PORT S MATRICES REAL BEHAVIOUR OF LUMPED ELEMENTS

z 1 ⎡ z 2 z0 ⎤
[S ] = ⎢2 z RESISTORS
z + 2 z0 ⎣ 0 z ⎥⎦

Widely used for biasing purposes. Sometimes used for matching purposes.
In a real resistor L is the lead inductance, C is a combination of parasitic
1 ⎡− z0 2z ⎤ capacitances which varies from resistor to resistor.
[S ] =
z z 0 + 2 z ⎢⎣ 2 z − z 0 ⎥⎦

Equivalent circuit
2
2n ⎤
L R L
1 ⎡1 − n
1 n [S ] = ⎢ 2 ⎥
1 + n 2 ⎣ 2n n − 1⎦

⎡ 1 0⎤ C
V1 μV 1 [S ] = ⎢2 μ
⎣ − 1⎥⎦
Typical characteristics

120
⎡ −1 0⎤
%
[S ] = ⎢ 2α 10 Ω
i1 αV1 − 1⎥ o
⎢⎣ z 0 ⎥⎦ f 100
d
c 80
1 KΩ
⎡ 1 0⎤ r
e 60
g mV 1 [S ] = ⎢ − 2 g z
⎣ m 0 1 ⎥⎦ s 10 KΩ
V1 i
s 40
t
a 100 KΩ
n
⎡ −1 0⎤ c 20
[S ] = ⎢ − 2 β e 1 MΩ
i1 βV1 ⎣ 1 ⎥⎦
0
1.0 10 100 1000
frequency (Mhz)

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 33 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 34

 REAL BEHAVIOUR OF LUMPED ELEMENTS REAL BEHAVIOUR OF LUMPED ELEMENTS
INDUCTORS
CAPACITORS
Widely used in RF applications for matching, filtering and reduce rf
Widely used in RF applications for bypassing, coupling, matching, filtering energy along a certain path
In a real capacitor Rs is the heat-dissipation resistance, Rp is the insulation In a real inductor R s is the heat-dissipation resistance, C d is the result of a
resistance and L is the inductance of leads and plates. series of distributed parasitic capacitances.

Equivalent circuit
Equivalent circuit L Rs
Rp
L Rs Cd
C
Impedance and Q factor vs frequency ( Q = X/ Rs ) X: reactance ( jLw)
i
Typical characteristics m Fr
p
e
d
Q
100 KΩ Fr
Fr Fr a
n
10 KΩ c
e
I
m 1 KΩ
p Typical characteristics
e 10 pF
d 100 120
a
n 15 nH 3.3 nH
c 10 100
e
68 nH
Ω 1.0 80
1000 pF Q
100 pF 60
0.1
1.0 10 100 1000
40
frequency (Mhz)
20

0
10 100 1000 10000
frequency (Mhz)
TERADYNE- RF BASIC 35 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 36
 IMPEDANCE MATCHING
LUMPED ELEMENTS ON THE SMITH CHART
Impedance matching is an ideal condition for obtaining no signal distortion
(amplitude and phase) and maximum power transfer to the load (if load is • Series inductor (8 nH at 1 Ghz is about j1)
matched to characteristic impedance then power reflected by load vanishes)
zs
zL 8nH
z0 zL zL=0.5 -j0.5
zin zL
Γs ΓL
Matching and maximum power transfer is obtained when zs = z0 = zL
Γ moves clockwise on the constant resistance circle
In real applications zL ≠ z0 and zs ≠ z0 .

THE MOST IMPORTANT IS TO MATCH THE LOAD. Zin= 0.5 + j0.5 x=1

x=2
1. Series matching: add a series resistor + series ind/cap

z0 ind x = 0.5
zL r = 0.5
cap zin
r=1

2. Shunt matching: add a shunt resistor + shunt ind/cap

z0 r=2
Ind cap zL zL
x = -0.5
3. Reactive impedance matching network x = -2

reactive x = -1
z 0 impedance
matching z L
network

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 37 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 38

 LUMPED ELEMENTS ON THE SMITH CHART LUMPED ELEMENTS ON THE SMITH CHART

• Shunt capacitor (6.4 pF at 500 Mhz is about j1)

• Series capacitor (2.13 pF at 1 Ghz is about -j1.5)

6.4 pF
zL zL=0.5 -j0.5 2.13 pF yL yL=0.5 - j 0.5 yin yL
zin zL

Γ moves clockwise on the constant admittance circle

Γ moves anti-clockwise on the constant resistance circle

Yin= 0.5 + j0.5 x = -1

Zin= 0.5 - j2.0
x=1
x=2 x = -2 g = 0.5
x = -0.5
x = 0.5 yL
g=1
r=1
r = 0.5
g=2
r=2
zL
yin
x = -0.5
x = 0.5
zin
x = -2 x=2
x = -1 x=1

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 39 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 40

 LUMPED ELEMENTS ON THE SMITH CHART TWO ELEMENT IMPEDANCE MATCHING

• Shunt inductor (16 nH at 500 Mhz is about -j1) HIGH PASS OPTION

yL yL=0.5 = j 2 16nH
Yin YL
z in zL z in
zL
moves anti-clockwise on the constant admittance circle

Yin= 0.5 + j1 x = -1
HIGH PASS OPTION
x = -2
x = -0.5
g = 0.5
g=1
z in zL

Γ
g=2
zL z in

y yin x = 0.5
L
x=2
x=1

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 41 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 42

 POWER MEASUREMENTS P O W E R M E A SU R E M E N T S
UNITS TO MEASURE POWER SCALA R M EASUREM ENT OF RETURN LOSS
• Decibel
dB = 10 log (P/Pref)
R eturn loss is defined as
Compressed scale. You can add dB when cascading devices
⎛ Preflected ⎞
• dBm R L = − 10 log ⎜ ⎟ = − 20 log Γ
dBm = 10 log (P/1mW) ⎝ Pincident ⎠
dBm stands for above 1 milliwatt
R eturn loss is m easured by separation of incident and
reflected pow er. Separation is done by using directional
couplers
HOW TO MEASURE POWER

• Using a power sensor

Incident power Reflected power

Calibrated
RF power RF power DC voltmeter Load
sensor

Thermistor
Thermocouple
Diode detector

• Using a calibrated down-converter Power

measurem ent

RF power Down
Low
D irectional coupler couples incident w ave to the left arm
converter frequency and reflected w ave to the right arm of the coupler. Internal
sw itches are used to m easure incident and reflected pow er.

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 43 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 44

 VECTORIAL MEASUREMENTS VECTORIAL MEASUREMENTS
VECTOR CALIBRATION
VECTORIAL Reflection Coefficient MEASUREMENT

Measurement is performed by sourcing one frequency. In order to accurately determine ΓL, a vector calibration must be
To obtain reflection coefficient at a certain point we need to know performed prior to measurement. This type of calibration takes into
magnitude and phase of incident and reflected waves at that point. account lengths, levels and mismatches. In the “low frequency”
region, calibration takes only into account the losses of level due to
the path.
Incident wave Reflected wave
One port calibration (3-Term Error Correction) OSL cal
Load
Calibration is performed by using open, short and load calibration standards in
order to account for the following 3-Term ErrorAdaptor

a 1
Γin ed es ΓL
Down conv
+ digitizer b
er
Incident and reflected waves are separated by directional couplers. Γmeas Calibration
High frequency signal is down-converted and then is digitized. Three unknowns ed, er and es. plane
Three known standards open (ΓL=1), short (ΓL=-1), load (ΓL=0).

From Γmeas(open), Γmeas(short) and Γmeas(load) we solve for ed, er and es.

When we have an unknown ΓL the system measures Γmeas . By using

calculated ed, er, es it is possible to obtain value for ΓL.

Two port calibration (12-Term Error Correction) OSLT cal

In a two port measurement (S parameters) model is more complicated (12

terms) and one more standard (Through) is used
incident reflected

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 45 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 46

 S-PARAMETERS MEASUREMENTS
S -P A R A M E T E R S M E A S U R E M E N T S

TWO PORTS VNA OVERVIEW

E R R O R S A F F E C T IN G V E C T O R M E A S U R E M E N T
ACCURACY
Swept
Source
S ystem atic erro rs

S tab le, rep eatable and rem o vab le erro rs d ue to cou plers
50 Ω d irectivity, m ism atch , an d fin ite p ort iso latio n .
T o rem ov e th ese errors use a full calib ration by u sing load
stand ards.
E rrors redu ctio n is lim ited by qu ality o f stan dards, an d b y
ran d om and drift erro rs.
a1 b1 b2 a2
R a n d o m errors

N o t rep eatab le and rem ov ab le erro rs d ue to system n oise

a1 S21 b2 flo or, ph ase no ise o f the so urce an d con nection s
rep eatability.
T h e system n oise floo r is strictly related to the dynam ic
S11 S22 ran g e o f the instru m ent.
R and om erro rs red u ction can b e achiev ed by av erag ing
o ver a n um b er o f m easurem ents
b1 S12 a2

Measurements are based on the ratio of reflected/transmitted and incident D rift erro rs
waves inside a 50 Ohm impedance system.
Waves separation is obtained by using directional couplers. D u e to tem p erature depen d encies o f instru m en tatio n and
so u rces.
D rift erro rs red u ctio n is achiev ed by recalib rating the
n etw o rk analyzer.

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 47 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 48

 S-PARAMETERS MEASUREMENTS
References
VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER CALIBRATION
Book:
Swept Source •Microwave Engineering, David M. Pozar, Addison Wesley
•RF Circuit Design, Chris Bowick, SAMS

50 Ω
Internet:
•www.signalintegrity.com
port 1 port 2
•www.signalintegrity.com/articles/edn/why50.htm
a1 b1 b2 a2 •http://radioworks.com/nbalmeas.html
•http://www.pilloud.net/op_web/faq.html
•http://www.kentech.co.uk/transmission_lines/Transmission_lines.html
calibration planes
•http://www.rfglobalnet.com

Connect standards at each port of your VNA. System will

calculate correction coefficients
Training:
• One port calibration
Connect Open, Short, Load to calibrate only one port •Besser RF Techniques I

• Two ports calibration •Besser RF and High Speed PC Board Fundamentals

Connect Open, Short, Load and through on each port to •RF uW6000 Mixed-Signal Microwave Test Basics
obtain full two port calibration
•RF uW6000 Digital Communications Programming (soon...)

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 49 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 50

Annexes

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 51 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 52

 Formulas
conductivity versus Frequency
Transmission line propagation
1) Time domain
z z
+ jω ( t − )
− jω ( t + )
v + v
V =V e V e
ω −z z
1 + j (t v ) jω ( t + )
v
I= (V e − V −e )
Z0
2) Frequency domain
z z
− jω + jω
+ −
V =V e v +V e v
− jω z + jω z
1 + −
I= (V e v − V e v )
Z0
Reflection coefficient Γ
−
V
Γ= +
V
Relation between reflection coefficient and impedance
z L − z0
Γ=
z L + z0
Voltage Standing wave ratio
Vmax
VSWR =
Vmin

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 53 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 54

 Formulas
Relation between VSWR and reflection coefficient
1+ Γ
VSWR =
1− Γ
Return Loss

⎛ Preflected ⎞
RL = −10 log⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = −20 log Γ
⎝ Pincident ⎠
Scattering matrix
b1
S11 =
a1 a2 = 0

b1
S12 =
a2 a1 = 0

b2
S22 =
a2 a1 = 0

b2
S21 =
a1 a2 = 0

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 55 TERADYNE- RF BASIC 56

TERADYNE- RF BASIC 57
A P P E N D I X D

Appendix

D
D. List of Reference Materials
1. Microwave Theory and Applications by Stephen F. Adams
pub: Adams Microwave Consulting ISBN 0-9634284-0-3 (A
good introductory text which takes the new RF engineer
through some of the theory and basics of microwave.)
2. RF Microelectronics by Behzad Razaui pub: Prentice
Hall ISBN 0-13-887571-5 - A more advanced text in a
very readable (not full of math) style covering the
basics of a lot of the microwave issues we use in the
testing area.
3. Some URLs for further information.
http://www.bessercourse.com/
http://www.gsmworld.com/index.shtml
http://www.umtsworld.com/
http://www.wi-fiplanet.com/
http://mwjournal.com/research
http://ece-www.colorado.edu/~kuester/Coax/connchart.htm
A P P E N D I X E

Appendix

E
E. Example Code from Lab Solutions